JP2020068939A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To avoid disadvantage of a player due to occurrence of an error that stops putout of game balls.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first display control means (performance control device 300) for displaying on a display device 41 a number-of-balls notification display (acquired total number image G31) for notifying a player of the number of game balls to be put out on the basis of winning into a variation winning device (special variation winning device 38); and second display control means (performance control device 300) for displaying on the display device 41 an error display (error image G12) for notifying the player of the error that stops the putout of the game balls. The error display has a higher display priority than the number-of-balls notification display (see Fig. 67 (b)), and the error display can be displayed during a special game state and displayed even after the special game state is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a variable winning device is converted into a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result.

When a variable display game is executed by the establishment of a predetermined condition and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result mode, a game machine provided with a control means capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, The variable winning device is provided which can be converted into an open state in which the balls easily win or a closed state in which the game balls do not win, and the control means easily establishes the predetermined condition within a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Based on the specific game state generating means for generating the specific game state, the game history information storing means for storing information generated during the game, and the information stored in the game history information storing means, a total of predetermined information An information output means for notifying a value for the first time at the end of the specific game state is provided, and it is possible to perform control for converting the variable winning device to an open state during the occurrence of the special game state. The information output means, as a total value of the predetermined information, in a special game state that has occurred from the occurrence of the first special game state to the end of the specific game state, with respect to the game ball that has won the variable winning device. A gaming machine is known that notifies the total value of the number of payouts and the number of times the special gaming state occurs from the occurrence of the first special gaming state to the end of the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP, 2013-226214, A

In the conventional gaming machine, when an error occurs that stops the payout of gaming balls, the notification of the number of payouts is given priority over the notification of the error, the player does not notice the occurrence of the error, and all the prize balls are There was a disadvantage that the game was ended before being paid out.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of gaming balls.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a variable winning device is converted into a state in which a game ball is easy to win when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result,
First display control means for displaying on the display device a ball number notification display for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the variable winning device.
A second display control means for displaying an error display on the display device for notifying that an error has occurred for stopping the payout of gaming balls,
The display priority of the error display is higher than that of the ball number notification display,
The error display can be displayed during the special game state, and can be displayed even after the special game state ends.
Further, the invention according to claim 2 is
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a variable winning device is converted into a state in which a game ball is easy to win when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result,
First display control means for displaying on the display device a ball number notification display for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the variable winning device.
A second display control means for displaying an error display on the display device for notifying that an error has occurred for stopping the payout of gaming balls,
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state different from the special game state,
The display priority of the error display is higher than that of the ball number notification display,
The error display can be displayed during the specific game state and can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flow chart explaining withdrawal command transmission processing. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure changing process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fixed condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value change processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining a schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process in the 10th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect in an 11th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the magnetic sensor in the 12th modification. It is an operation | movement chart of the magnetic sensor in the 12th modification. It is a figure explaining electric wave abnormality monitoring and magnetic abnormality monitoring in a 12th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 12th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 12th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of button production. It is a figure explaining an example of button production. It is a figure explaining an example of button production and an example of information. It is a figure explaining an example of a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a production sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, on the front frame (main body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp or LED (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b inform the user of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full. A lower tray (reception tray) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an eject button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation handle 24 to cause the ball launching device to direct the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, the player operates the effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 to produce effects in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game areas 32 are resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30, respectively.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device 41 at the substantially center is arranged. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left part and the right part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 is provided which is a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and for displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting section that forms a sub-game display section that displays a fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game. The sub game display section 91 and the second sub composed of a single light emitting section forming a sub game display section for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game. And a game display section 92. Further, the first special display variable display game which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by the two light emitting parts, and the second special figure variable display game which is executed by the two light emitting parts A second sub-display section 94 showing the number of second starting memories, which is the right to perform.

In the first sub game display section 91 and the second sub game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being variably displayed and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking and lit of the light emitting section. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first starting memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold), respectively, to turn off the two light emitting parts, It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 4.
By displaying the data in No. 1, it is possible to effectively utilize the display area without occupying the display area of the display device 41. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board production device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board production device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate 34 (general figure starting gate, starting area, inflow area) for providing the starting conditions of the figure varying display game is provided. The game ball that won the universal figure starting gate 34 is a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Detected by.
On the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the universal figure starting gate 34. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a starting condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, directly below the starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing the start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that is opened by turning in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. This movable member 37b is
It normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electric prize solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device is used to open the game ball easily into the regular variation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the player may win the prize rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the state where the special winning opening is closed (the closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (
It is converted to a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38, for example,
Open / close door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a special winning opening that can be opened and closed by a special winning state or small hitting game state, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is easy for the game balls to flow into the big winning opening. Then, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By thus providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flown into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning at the starting winning opening 36 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), and shoot the game ball to the right game area (so-called). By hitting the right side, the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 3
7 and special variable winning device 38 can be aimed at.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is such that the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 can be visually recognized from the outside. The game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball that flows down the right-side game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and a first special figure variation display section (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for the first special figure variation display game. The second special figure variation display section (special figure 2 display) 52 for the variation display game, the variation display section (general figure display) 53 for the general figure variation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a storage display unit 54, 55, 56 for informing the number of starting memories of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50, a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57, which informs that the right-handed state is more advantageous than the left-handed state, 57 When a state occurs, a second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator, time saving state informing unit) 58 that lights up to inform the occurrence of a time saving state, a probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game state display section (third game state display unit, probability state display section) 59 for displaying that
The round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds (the number of times the special variation winning device 38 is opened and closed) at the time of a big hit
0 is provided.
Note that the collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display unit 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the off result mode (special result mode) is off. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the result mode.

The public figure display 53 blinks a lamp during the change to display that the change is occurring, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the universal figure holding indicator 56 displays the number of starting memories (= holding number) of the universal figure starting gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the universal figure indicator 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. Special Figure 1 Hold indicator 54
Is the number of undivided balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the winning ball numbers into the starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special map 1 display 51, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the start memory number (= holding number) of the second start winning a prize mouth (ordinary variable winning a prize device 37) which becomes the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, turning off the plural LEDs, Display by blinking or lighting.

The first gaming state display section (right hitting notification section) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting). When the player is in a game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in a normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. If the time saving condition occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), turn on the lamp.

The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the gaming machine 1
When the probability state of the big hit is 0 in the low probability state (normal probability state) when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probability change state) Turns the lamp on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU section 110 having the same, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. .

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called an amusement chip (IC)).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of the random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage during a power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
The control signal generator 430 has a power failure monitoring circuit, and generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is off. Then, when the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects having different possibility of deriving the special result mode (different expected values), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation for generating various random patterns for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (
(Big hit or small hit) or out), probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving) Based on the operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Where the CPU
111A constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the universal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is detached from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the occurrence of, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The proximity I / F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is a set value change function that serves as a detection unit that detects an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability set values to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that is the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. The setting key switch 152 is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button that is a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed,
If it is not pressed, it is turned off.

By operating these operation parts, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value can be played in the game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six probability setting values, setting 1 to setting 6, are prepared. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/28 in setting 5.
The value is 0, and the setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value changing button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operating unit is turned on after turning on the power of the gaming machine. When turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is changed to the probability setting value display device 153.
The probability setting value confirmation mode is displayed, but the probability setting value cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability setting value from 1 to 1.
It is designed to be displayed with the number 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode in which the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. Further, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.
In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability setting value is displayed, and otherwise the calculated base value and role ratio Give priority to the display.

In the present embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3, etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability set value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, you may make it provide a setting means separately from the game control apparatus 100. In this case, the operation signals of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or on the setting sub-board side. The probability setting value is changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value changing switch 151 or the setting key switch 152,
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10
It is also designed to be supplied from 0 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the later-described first input port 122.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based signal), out ball detection switch signal (based on the detection by the out switch that detects all game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing) The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
2nd for outputting the opening / closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c which opens b
An output port 134 is provided. The second output port 134 also outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.

In addition, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. Of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 displaying the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fifth output port 137 to supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that receives display data output from the second output port 134 and causes the status display device 160 to display the data are provided. ..

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the game microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b
Is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of interrupt signals INT0-n and command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I / F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the sub information display device 90 that have LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (including the center case 40) Board production device 4 provided
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., include an address / data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device) and the like, and the movable production member that operates produces a movable production device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. A rendering device may be provided and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. To detect the ON / OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or 1.2V DC. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like, and resets them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The winning prize 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, or it flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And the general winning opening 35
When a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). From the payout unit, the glass plate 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided,
When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the universal figure starting memory number is set. The addition (+1) is performed and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not running, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the normal figure starting memory stored first is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit state of the variable figure display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the universal figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the universal figure variation display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, a process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the universal figure display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols,
A character pattern or the like may be used, and after it is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it may be stopped and displayed to display the result.

When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that forms a special result mode on the universal figure display 53 according to the type of hit At the same time as displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the lighting pattern on the general-picture display 53, which is the result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winning in the starting winning opening 36 is set.
In addition to storing up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored. Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. Then, the number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 reserved display 54 and the special figure 2 reserved display 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 the decorative special figure starting memory. Displayed as a display. Further, it is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and the processing of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result form) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. Further, when the second special figure variable display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device) (for example,
A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 displays the decorative special figure variation display game in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variable display area (first special symbol),
In the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped sequentially in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving interest.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, makes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special view 2 display device 52. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU 111A controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until a condition is reached in which a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. 1 to open
It is set as a round, and control (cycle game) for continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening / closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, after the special game state is finished, the game state is a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state, second operation state).
Can be generated. In this time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal probability low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
In other words, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is configured to be controlled in one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which winning is easier than in the first operation state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 6
When it becomes 00 msec and the ordinary figure variation display game is a hit result and the ordinary variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (universal electric opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500).
msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (eg 17
00msec x 2 times), 3rd stop symbol opening time (universal electric opening time) and opening times (eg,
1700 msec × 3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the ordinary variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (
It is possible to control the normal figure variation time) to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal figure variation display game is a hit result and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of hitting once in the universal figure changing display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening more than that (for example, four times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can be independently generated, both of them can be simultaneously generated, or only one of them can be generated.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special display variation display is made so as not to be executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
The second special figure variable display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variable display game. That is, when there is a starting memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is It is designed to be executed (executed with priority). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, a large winning opening switch 38a, and an out switch for detecting all game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches a coil for magnetic detection is used for the There is. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 etc. are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4)
. In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
A process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

The third input port 124 has a set value change switch 151 and a set key switch 1
The signal from the switch 52 and the signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 at power-on Also, the state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes an opening / closing detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, the front frame 12 is opened,
When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is set. If the power is turned on with the setting value change button pressed down without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, RA
The M111C is cleared (initialized). Since the setting key operation unit and the set value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12
Is required to be released.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the set value change button. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value changing button from the time when the power is turned on to the lapse of the waiting time. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at power-on cannot be accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with a malfunction at power-on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the waiting time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access to a read / write memory (RWM) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and OFF data is output (output to all output ports). Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y).
, The value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal, the power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h
) Is determined (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in the probability setting value changing state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. Note that it is determined here that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off and the RAM data is normally backed up while the probability setting value is being changed. In this case, the probability setting value is again set. The value is changed. If the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), the state of the previously input third input port 124 is changed to the body frame (
It is determined whether the front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. To be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value changing state and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial value random numbers, hit initial value random numbers, and hit symbol initial value random numbers that are updated at any time are stored. In addition, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the fluctuation pattern random number area. In the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. In addition, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, an accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set in the work area for status display.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, or the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required for displaying the base value includes, for example, information about the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information about the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the winning character is the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present time (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning prize (excluding the middle) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information required to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (acquired ball count by role goods).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variable pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, a RAM clear start address 1 which will be described later is a start address of the area for the probability setting value, and the RAM is cleared while the address is set to perform the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number. The area for use, the area for changing pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, a RAM clear top address 3 described later is the top address of the area for game control, and RA is set in the state where this address is set.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control will be cleared.

Note that the status display area is initialized if it is abnormal by judging the validity in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case, the state display area may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation processing in step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. Note that one or more of the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, the game control region, and the state display region may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the correctness may be determined individually. You may make it judge collectively.

If the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state based on the state of the third input port 124 previously read (step S23).
). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
Then, the RAM initialization process and the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. If the setting key switch is not on (step S23; N),
If the body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). To do.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30
Go to and perform the processing when the power is restored normally. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It forms the initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S
16; N or step S17; N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (
In step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25, and initialization processing of all RAM areas is performed. That is, the probability setting value RAM area and the status display RAM area are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random number, the area for fluctuation pattern random number and the RAM area for game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and the third address previously read is set.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the random value for the initial value are used. The area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

If the setting key switch is not in the on state (step S27; N) or the main frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is given to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited. Performance control device 30
In 0, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 19a are received based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. , 19b to output a voice or the like to notify that the probability setting value should be changed. This notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

In this case, after turning off the power of the gaming machine, the front frame 12 is opened, and the power is turned on again while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
Then, the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is shut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state cannot be changed to the probability set value changing state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is made by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may make the notification. For example, the notification may be performed on the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and the display that is not used as the identification information is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display may be provided to notify the abnormality.

In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process when the power is restored normally, the initial value at the time of power restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the probability of the special figure is not high (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3.
Skip 3 and move to step S34. If the probability of the special figure is high (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command when in the customer waiting state, a restoration screen command in other cases) is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, or the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure variation display game interrupted by power-off as the control is restarted, a recovery screen command forming recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off in the customer waiting state and the power is restored to restart the control in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in the case of restarting the special game state that was interrupted due to the power interruption with the restart of the control, the special game state restart command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S35).
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process shifts from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and the process moves from step S27, RA
Since M clear top address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for fluctuation pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initialized. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, and is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a fraudulent act, damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process for changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value change state is set. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153.

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, the value is saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , And proceeds to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90 is displayed based on the reception of the command during the probability setting change,
LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operation of the board production device 44, speaker 19
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting a voice by a or 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command for RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. Also, settings for outputting a security signal are performed. In this case, the timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be output continuously during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized here, the setting for outputting the security signal may be omitted.

Further, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA is executed as the initialization processing of the RAM area for game control.
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44,
Model designation command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information which is information on the selected probability setting value, a RAM initialization command (to display a customer waiting demo screen and to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) Multiple commands). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, or the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

In step S45, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
The value of is extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure (hit random number) ), After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (a winning symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number updating process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop pattern of the game. In addition, "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure variation display game, and "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. Is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process. Incidentally, the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no random number for the initial winning symbol.

In addition, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the unit of the timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked.
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number updating process (
It returns to step S49). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by waiting for the initial value random number updating processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S5)
2; N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). In addition, if the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting is performed (step S53).
), A process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and the secondary control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), And the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) and the operation state of the initialization means are read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process of step S26 is performed.
The process returns to step S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
If the state of repeating the processing of 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may make it shift to 9 and wait for the power supply cutoff.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the probability setting value changing state may be set only when the setting value changing switch is in the ON state. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y) without performing the process of step 23, the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value changing state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for random pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value and ending. Thus, if the probability setting value changing state is set only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is in the ON state, the structure of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control means stores the stored contents even in a power-off state. A storage unit (RAM 111C) that can be held and a validity determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on is valid (game control device 10)
0) and an initialization unit (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage unit by the validity determination unit. If it is determined that the information that is stored is not valid, the notification that prompts the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state. Also, R
When the AM 111C is initialized, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by informing the selection of the probability setting value, the game is initialized. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the store from being left set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability setting value can be selected when the operation section is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that it is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game shop from being left set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game shop from being left set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means determines the specific information. This means that the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed based on the reception of the. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game shop from being left set by the initialization.

Moreover, when the specific information is received, the effect control means is configured to continue the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game shop from being left set by the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control means,
A storage unit (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is off is provided, and when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, based on the information stored and held in the storage unit. When the power is turned on and the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the control means is provided with a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. When it is determined that the stored information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification that prompts the initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to change the probability setting value by the setting means to a changeable state and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation portion is not operated, the first operation portion is operated. This means that a notification prompting the power to be turned on is given. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change). It is necessary for the control of the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means that includes information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means. Storage means capable of storing information (RAM 11
1C), and the control means is adapted to initialize the storage means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation part of the plurality of operation parts is operated. .. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is the CPU 1
It is started by being input to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in the predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 of the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (shooting permission signal) indicating the launch permission state as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process.
5), random number update processing 2 (step S106) for updating the random number of the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. After that, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 3
5a, a special winning opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a normal signal is input from the special winning opening switch 38a and for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) (step S107) is performed.

Next, a probability setting value changing process (step S1) for changing and confirming the probability setting value.
08) is performed, and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S109). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

If it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process relating to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process relating to the figure changing display game and the general figure game process (step S113) for performing the process relating to the figure changing display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (step S
109; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process shifts to step S114 without performing the above-mentioned processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the general figure game process (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed and the prize balls may be paid out. In addition, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may not be performed and the random number may not be updated in the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, the segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio wave irregularity for processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
16) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) of setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. A state display edit output process is performed to calculate (step S118), and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c are combined and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit / external information output port. 136
Is output (step S146).

Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", the data of "big hit signal 4", the data of "symbol confirmation frequency signal", the data of "starting port signal" , "Main prize ball signal" data) and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S1).
50), and outputs the combined data to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the OFF output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content on the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag indicates the probability setting value display device 15.
This is a flag that is set when the display regarding the probability setting value is permitted in 3.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
The probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154),
The display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability setting value (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, the data for display of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is for the information regarding the probability set value in the test signal to the test / trial shooting device. This simplifies the process and allows the accurate information to be output without changing the probability setting value information. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and if it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Then, the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmitting process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, the winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the three prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize prize of the prize number counter area 2 can be stored. The ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, if there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and whether or not the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed is completed. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to step 181, the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Obtains the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fraction which is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), the step S189 is performed.
The process moves to 192. When the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, each time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S191), and step S18
Return to processing of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact result of the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in the state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shoot ball out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of award balls not yet paid out = remaining number of game balls remaining) ) Is present (when not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Prize counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in step S195 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, A payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, and will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and will be backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, in addition to performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38)
Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and payout control means for controlling payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means, based on a state signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and showing whether or not the payout control means can start payout control When the control for transmitting the command to the payout control means is performed and a power failure occurs and the power is restored, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, immediately. The prize ball command is paid out in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control without continuously transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means for a predetermined period. Send to control means And thus it has to so that.

In addition, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 3
7, general winning a prize port 35, special variation winning device 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has not transmitted a prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game ball for each prize ball. Is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, the state signal indicates that payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control to each prize ball command counter. This means that the determination is made prior to specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, special variable prize device 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means is a prize ball when the state signal output from the payout control means, which indicates whether the payout control can start the payout control, can start the payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls in a predetermined winning area (main External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine
And the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the status signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control. Becomes

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period and the prize ball command is issued. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). With a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). The prize ball command is generated in units of one prize, and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued to the payout control means (
It is configured to transmit to the payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 10
0) is capable of storing information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, updating when a game ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, and giving a prize ball command to the payout control means. The number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the external information output means, and the payout is determined according to the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area. It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls and output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the cumulative value reaches a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal counter is a unit of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the information of the prize, and when the game sphere is won in the predetermined prize area, the update is performed at the time of winning, and the update process is performed in correspondence with the process of accumulating the number of prize balls by the external information output means. Can remember the number of prize balls It made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs the game ball number of 1
The main prize ball signal is output every time the number of balls becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the updated (set) number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 coins are actually paid out, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc. and the payout is done after the big hit ends, the hall prize (hall computer) will be Information can be collected (judged).

[Winning prize switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07). In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S299). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S299).
300). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as the processing regarding the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the probability setting value is being changed (
If it is the step S299; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value changing state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game is not allowed to proceed without performing the winning process.

In addition, in the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variation winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal movement winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning port is always winning. The winning prize is not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 or the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. In addition, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the prize-winning port monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the prize-winning prize switches 38a in the prize-winning prize (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the winning opening and detect a normal prize.

In the winning hole monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
The information of the illegal prize winning error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize winning number (the number of illegal occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table, the number of times monitoring is repeated (the number of switches)
In addition, for each switch, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning a prize opening switch 38a in the award winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning a prize is open even though the winning a prize opening is not opened. A fraud that monitors your mouth for illegal prizes and detects normal prizes
The prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305), and monitor Poden for an unauthorized winning even though Poden is not open. At the same time, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) of detecting a normal prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) capable of always winning is prepared (step S30).
7) The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, and when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, the glass frame opening detection switch 63
The status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the, and the status scan counter value is "1".
If it is, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is monitored. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), A gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as an error (step S)
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Two signal based condition monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change processing, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in a changed state (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value changed state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. Then, the probability setting value confirmation processing is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing processing ends.

When the probability setting value change state is set (step S401; Y), -1 is updated if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. . If the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) moves to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and the output processing described above causes the probability setting value display device 153 to display nothing.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability set value changed is a state in which a confirming operation described later is performed and a probability set value used in the game is newly set, and in this case, the probability set value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination as to whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (
The step S406; N) moves to the step S411.

If there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value changes sequentially. It should be noted that when the value of the work probability setting value area is +1 when the value is 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used in the game is not changed. The probability setting value selected based on the confirming operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it to a number other than this.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display in which nothing is displayed is performed, and then the new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, the blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be set. For example, in the case of displaying the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6,
The display other than this number may be the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value. Further, when displaying the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display blinks, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from the case where the display is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not the specific display. .

In addition, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46,
You may make it perform the specific notification which is a notification that the selected probability setting value was changed by the operation of the board production device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. That is,
The specific notification may be given together with or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability set value display device 153 may be displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value changing process ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This allows
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used in the game. That is, touching the operating handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirming operation, and an operating unit for the confirming operation may be provided in the setting means.

Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. . In the effect control device 300, the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90 are received based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting value.
Is displayed, the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 emit light, the operation of the board effect device 44, and the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not turned off (
Step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is at the second position, the probability setting value changing process ends. When the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM is set.
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, and the state display region are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers may be cleared. Also, among the areas for probability setting values, areas related to changing work, such as the work probability setting value area for temporarily storing information on the probability setting values selected in the probability setting value changing state and various flags, are cleared. It Therefore, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. Also, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( (Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting value,
Display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
Of the light, the operation of the board production device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b,
It notifies that the change of the probability setting value is completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting. A plurality of commands such as a change end command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, or the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The probability setting values to which the probability values used in the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of kinds of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). From the operation of the operation unit, the setting unit (gaming control device 100) is provided, and the setting unit includes a display unit (probability set value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value. When the display on the display unit is updated as the probability setting value is selected, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is adapted to display, as the specific display, a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period in a manner different from that after the certain period has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation processing (step S422) in the probability setting value changing processing. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not set (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether the game is in progress (step S
433).

"Playing" refers to a case where the special figure variation display game is being executed, the public figure variation display game is being executed, the special game state is in progress, or the general figure is in a hit state. That is, this is a case where the game state is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be informed that it is in the middle of playing a game, so that information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered is transmitted and the fact is notified.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. The condition may be one or more states selected from the running state of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the general figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the general figure. It may be determined that a game is being played when either the variable display game is being executed or the special game state is in effect. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is being played and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered.

In addition, even if the game balls are detected for a predetermined period after the game balls are detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, the probability set value confirmation mode may not be set. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, during the power saving mode which is shifted by a certain period of time while the game is not being played, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be shifted. The power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state, that is, whether the operating portion has been operated and is in the predetermined state (step S433).
434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S4)
34; Y) sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (step S435) and sets the probability setting value display permission flag (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability set value currently set is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153.

After that, save the initial value in the security signal control timer area (step S437),
The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect are received based on the reception of the command during confirmation of the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. in this case,
Probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and the probability set value display device 153 displays nothing. Then, a command for ending confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442).
, The probability setting value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed, based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting value.

That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position with the power turned on, and ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state is set.

As described above, even if the setting key switch is turned on during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode can be prevented from being known while the game is in progress. It is possible to secure the fairness of the game. It should be noted that even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is being played, the probability set value confirmation mode is not shifted, but the setting key switch is turned on during the game and is not in the game while the on state is maintained. In case of, it shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode depending on the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. It suffices to select whether or not to do it. For example, in the high probability state, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, as will be described later, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), and the setting means is operated to operate to a predetermined value. Based on the state, it is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and the game state controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the confirmation state. In this case, even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, the confirmation state is not set. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being displayed.

The prohibited state means that the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to secure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to secure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. Based on the general figure game (general figure variation display game) is executed, when the result of the general figure game is a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state (general figure hit state). It is provided with a normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated, and the prohibited state is a state in which the general-university game is being executed or is in a hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to secure the fairness of the game.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state in a state in which the game state controlled by the control means is in the prohibited state, and when the prohibited state ends while the predetermined state is maintained, Upon completion, the confirmation state is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
The input of 7a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the normal winning a prize device 3 forming the starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening
If there is a winning of a game ball in 7, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning. Make a decision.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if it has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the special figure variable display game is monitored, and the setting of change start and effect of the special figure variable display game, and the change of special figure are in progress. The special figure normal process (step A8) for setting the information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure stop display time is set, and information required for performing the special figure displaying process is set. (Step A
Perform 9).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and a special winning opening for each big hit Special figure display processing (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing
)I do.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening is updated, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, and the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit end process are executed. Special winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary to perform
I do.
When the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the special winning opening when the small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. The small hit fanfare medium processing (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "8", the process for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc.
16) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed for setting the information necessary for performing.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is executed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , The special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

Incidentally, the small hit is a result mode in which the condition device is not operated, and the big hit is a special result in which the condition device is operated. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and then, 1 It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (universal support is available) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104;
For Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) does not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous than the left-handed state in the gaming state, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In the above, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared for a winning monitoring table (step A1).
09), a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111
At N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric auditors product is operating (step A112; Y). , And proceeds to the processing of step A114 to perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, step A
If it is determined in 112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred,
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, when it is determined that the illegality is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), Figure common start switch common processing (step A115)
The starting port switch monitoring process ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37),
The winning opening information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A121), and the starting opening 1 switch 3 is set.
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
Of the start switch 2a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal output number, which is the number of times the information about the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal output number area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N
) Ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) The target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure holding number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition processing is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. The data is saved in the area (step A139). Next, a big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A142)
; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first start opening has won (step A142).
142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step A147), and an effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
The special process starting port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning area 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is formed as a storage. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37),
It is stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned common start port switch process.
Details of 6) will be described. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36). Yes (step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A151
; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A151
151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing is being shortened (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing is not in a short time (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1)
In 53; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value is equal to the big hit determination value. The big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. When the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step A156), and at step A140 of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A158)
; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and step A164
Process shifts to.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is the first start opening (step A158
158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step A
163), and proceeds to the processing of step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1
62) and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process of setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A166). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. That is, the determination is performed according to the set probability setting value. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target, and a read-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (
For example, a judgment is made as to whether or not a special result is obtained). Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Further, the special figure 1 reservation number is “0” (step A3).
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), The special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the starting condition is not satisfied, a customer waiting demo command which forms waiting information is produced.
Will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
In Y), the process of steps A310 to A312 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A313.

In addition, in step A301, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 variation start processing (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special maps 1 is not “0” (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 variation start processing (
Step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, the special figure 2 pending number is checked before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, so that when the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A308) in the above-described special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A321),
The shift information and the big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure variable display game is the big hit, and it is judged whether or not the first special figure variable display game is the small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the deviation information and the small hit information for the small hit flag for performing is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing (step A) related to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information)
323) is performed, special figure information setting processing (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) of setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process of setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Then, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, Saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of 1) is set (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start processing ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A341), and second.
The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing which relates to the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information) (step A
343), after performing special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of 2) is set (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the big hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state),
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, like the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment process is ended. It should be noted that the out-of-range in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be judged as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination processing. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A3
83; N) determines whether or not there is a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A384).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). If it is not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A381.

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is the big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Further, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value do not overlap in the same probability setting value. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value between different probability setting values may or may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402).
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment process is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, when it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in the judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Further, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting values are different, but the small hit lower limit judgment value may be changed depending on the probability setting value. Select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

Also, a process of setting an upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381)
Alternatively, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referred probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be performed assuming that it is a preset probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error may be notified when an abnormality occurs. Further, although the probability setting value is referred to for each of the big hit determination and the small hit determination, when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value changing state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value is set. It is also possible to perform a process of setting a small hit upper limit judgment value and only refer to this when making a big hit judgment or a small hit judgment.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A
601), effect command setting processing is performed (step A602). In other words, the symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the running special figure variation display game ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the effect control device 300,
Upon receipt of this symbol stop command, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, the big hit symbol pattern, or the small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" relating to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A6).
05), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (eg, special symbol) 2 Turn OFF the changing signal) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is executed. The value (for example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), As the information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, save the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special drawing display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's A process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device in-operation signal is turned on, a role product continuous operation device in-operation signal is turned on, for the start of the big hit (special tok 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game,
The special symbol 2 per signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ((
If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory device is ON, and the accessory character is ON, for example) regarding the start of the big hit (TOKYO 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game. Signal is ON during continuous operation device is ON, signal per special symbol is ON) RW
The data is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A707), and the process for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. In the upper limit number of rounds area (step A710). Next, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is acquired.
The data is saved in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting processing (step A71).
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern)
The fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the universal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O when the jackpot is a jackpot (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1).
N, no big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. Big winning opening information is big winning opening information 1
), It is turned on during a big hit in the time saving state, and turned off otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit, and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure changing display game and the special figure changing display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is won. The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). After that, the fanfare /
In-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
5; Y), a high-probability-variation-number update process (step of updating the value (high-probability-variation number) in the high-probability-variation-number region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high-probability state (step A
726), the production mode information check process regarding the production mode setting (step A727)
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N
), Load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (Step A
729) and effect command setting processing (step A730). Next, the small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and the effect command setting process (step A73).
2) is performed and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A72
8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
In 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but in order not to make the player aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" relating to the small hitting fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output (big hit + small hit is output. )) In the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring outside-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal related to a right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the indicator LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) during right-handed driving is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state is high. High-probability-variation-number update processing (step A743) that updates the value of the area (high-probability-variation number), and production mode information check processing (step A7) related to the production mode setting.
44) to set the remaining rotation speed for preparation for switching corresponding to the effect mode number (step A7).
45), it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotational speed and the switching preparation remaining rotational speed match (step A7).
46). It should be noted that the remaining rotation speed for preparation for switching may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any effect mode of the effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), The special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the universal figure game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a universal electric prize switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the general figure variation display game and the variation of the general figure are being monitored. An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the figure game process number is "1" at step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is executed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in the time saving state. In addition, processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed to set information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure.
Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "3", the processing is continued during the universal figure hit, or the information necessary for performing the ordinary ball remaining ball process is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the normal electric ball remaining process (step B12) is performed to set information necessary for performing the universal figure per end process.
Further, in step B7, when the figure / universal figure game processing number is "5", the figure / universal figure end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the figure / universal figure ordinary processing is executed.

After that, after preparing a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the regular symbol by the universal symbol display 53 (step B15) is performed, and the general-university game processing ends.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal / universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal / universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301), and when the normal / universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y). )
Sets "0" related to the ordinary figure normal process as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the ordinary figure normal process ends.

In addition, when the universal figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), the random number is stored from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), the per symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is It is determined whether or not the probability that the figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the probability that the figure is low) is high, that is, the state is in a time saving state (step B303).

If it is not in the high probability of the figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the low probability of the figure is set (step B304), and it is in the high probability of the figure (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306). It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (step B
307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3
07; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the deviation symbol information in the general figure stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of winning at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of low probability of ordinary figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B317), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the universal figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per figure are moved to the values of 4 for reserved figure of general figures in the random number storage area for each figure of 3 Will be done.
Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the general-university-fluctuation process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the general-university-variation process is performed, and the general-university-figuration normal process ends. That is, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure variation display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the universal figure starting gate 34 (inflow region) (based on the regular figure starting memory). Make up.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the routine figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the routine figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the general figure display time (for example, 600 msec) which is the display time of the result of the general figure variation display game on the general figure display 53 is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B403), and the variation of the general figure is ended. Save the signal (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B404),
A stop flag indicating that the general / universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general / universal figure variation control flag area (step B405), and the general / universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B10) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or off information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B515), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing for displaying the universal figure is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0 Or “5”) and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer ((
For example, “4” or “7”) is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per universal figure (step B506). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 1700m) corresponding to the universal pattern stop symbol information
Seconds or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing of ordinary figure hit (step B
508) and save the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, a normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of normal electric actuation (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) are test signals. The data is saved in the output data area (step B510), and a signal for driving (turning on) the universal solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information on the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 during the ordinary electricity fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

[Middle processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process of hitting a general figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the universal figure hitting process, first, the universal figure hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; N
) Performs +1 update of the control pointer during normal drawing (step B603), and performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during normal drawing (value before +1 update in step B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during ordinary drawing (step B604), without performing the processing of updating the processing control pointer area during ordinary drawing by +1 in step B603.

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time after blockage of 37 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the OFF data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B606). The process in FIG.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The normal electric opening time, which is the opening time, is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B607), and the ON data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area to turn on the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened.
Save the opening time of the normal electric car, which is the opening time of the normal electric car, in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B60).
9) In order to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B610), and the ordinary drawing hitting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process, and thus the process number. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B612), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B614), and the general-purpose hitting process is ended.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, the wait time is 300 m in step B605.
Seconds, in step B607, the normal battery opening time is 1700 ms, in step B609, the normal battery opening time is 2600 ms, and in step B613, the normal battery remaining ball processing time is 6 seconds.
Save 00 ms.
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec", so the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the public figure, so that the general electric vehicle opens for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the general figure is "2".
The wait time of 300 msec is set for updating to, and then the control pointer for Uzu hits is released for 1700 msec because the control pointer is updated to "3". Since it is updated to ", the processing time for the remaining electric ball of Poden is set to 600 msec.

If the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine symbol displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "2600 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "2600 msec", so the normal call is released for 2600 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the public figure, so that the electric train opens for 2600 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "7" during the public figure for 600 msec. The remaining electric ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes the general figure game (general figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the general figure game is a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a hit state (universal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, payout command transmitting process (step S111)
, Winning hole switch / state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N). , OFF data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is activated in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Process shifts to. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. .

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S81).
2) Y), while the illegality is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. The data is saved in the data area (step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Process shifts to. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), nor the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N).
If it is not during the occurrence of fraudulent normal communication (step S813; N) and is not during the occurrence of fraudulent winning hole (step S814; N), then it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815)
; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step S820).
)I do.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is "0" (step S822).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time has not expired, save the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S824), and the external information editing process ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as change of brightness of liquid crystal and liquid crystal, volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, the V blank interrupt (1/6
When 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated at 1/60 seconds (frame switching), or the image may be updated at a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame switching). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, sub information display device 90, and the like. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed,
The process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (
(Step C201), it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202).
. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When it is determined that the CT is within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
, It is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23).
4).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232). C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot type command (
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243). Then, when MODE is determined to be within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The read-ahead variation system command and the read-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the read-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to inform the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which is the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Further, with respect to a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot system command process. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the change of the probability setting, confirming the probability setting value, and ending confirmation of the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in such a case, the probability setting value may be changed. However, since the RAM is initialized with the end of the probability setting value changing state, it is executed during the special figure variation display game, the general figure variation display game, the special game state, or the general figure hit state. It may be a condition that does not correspond to. Further, it may be on condition that the customer is in a waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the state may not be changed to the probability set value changing state.

Further, although it has been stated that the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, RA
The RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the M111C is abnormal.

Although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows probability setting values in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0-5. The work probability setting value region is also the same. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in the settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three steps. Other than this, it is similar to FIG. By doing so, if the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

Note that which probability setting value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability set value area (working probability set value area) is updated by +1 by operating the set value change button, the order of probability values that change when the set value change button is operated by changing the allocation is different. In order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as other probability set values is assigned to two probability set values, the change stages can be set to four stages, and any stage from one stage to six stages can be set.

FIG. 35C also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, FIG.
The settings 4 to 6 in Step 1 are set to Settings 1 to 3, and the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.
The display in (1) corresponds to this and is also set to 1-3. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible for the staff in charge of the work to easily grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35D also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set substantially only one probability value, and even when the function of changing the probability value is not necessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153, but the operation is performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for the worker to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is 6, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more in order to be able to set a larger number of steps. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be independently determined. However, when only the big hit and the small hit are obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Also, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of hitting the universal figure variation display game may be set according to a probability setting value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, when the function for changing the probability value is unnecessary. In this case, the setting sub-board may be removed and the sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. Further, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability varying function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in the present modified example includes a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off. This storage means is configured to store the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and to pay out based on the information stored here. In this way, the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, so that the game control device 100 sequentially sends the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Payout control device 2
At 00, upon receipt of this payout instruction command, the payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the profit for the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification of urging the probability setting value to be changed, the effect control device 300 may also notify that the payout may be performed. May be. Moreover, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is not limited to the above case, and for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 in FIG. S40) and also when the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20
A payout command (specific information) may be transmitted to 0.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned based on the information from the game control means. A setting means that makes it possible to select the obtained probability setting value from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)) Based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control means, payout control means (payout control device 20) for controlling the payout of the game medium.
0) and, the game control means, the storage means (R
AM111C), validity determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value Based on the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means, and when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, it is specified. The information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means issues a notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power source. The payout information storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the cutoff state and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means is provided, and when the specific information is received, based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. The fact that to perform the control to pay out can game medium.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the profit obtained by the player from being impaired. Further, by initializing the RAM 111C, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by initializing the notification by prompting the selection of the probability setting value. By this, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the gaming shop from being left set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In the probability setting value changing process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not a condition for confirming the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the definite condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S45).
7), the processing of steps S412 to S415 is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing ends.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first confirmation condition that is the condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability set value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second definite condition as described later, and here, the second definite condition is established because the first definite condition based on the input from the touch switch is established. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451).
). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

When the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the finalized condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value changing state continues. Further, when the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3
Second) is saved (step S453), and the end standby flag is set (step S454).
).

Then, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). When the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing is ended. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch which is the second operation is performed, the second confirmation condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first confirming condition or the second confirming condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value used in the game.
Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, when the power is shut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value changing state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value changing state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, the probability setting value selected may be set when three or more definite conditions are prepared and any one of them is satisfied.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information of the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1), and when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value is set. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance. For example, the same probability setting value as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be set value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is one of a plurality of confirmation conditions. This means that the probability setting value selected is set based on the fact that either of the conditions is established. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed. Further, by providing a plurality of confirmation conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved.

In addition, the setting means, if the power is cut off before any of the plurality of definite conditions are satisfied,
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of finalizing conditions include a first finalizing condition and a second finalizing condition, the first finalizing condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second finalizing condition is the first operation. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example does not include a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. Moreover, the transition conditions to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 39 in place of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the previously read state of the third input port 124? Is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination processing (step S63; Y), a process for initializing the RAM and changing the setting value to the probability setting value changing state Then, the process proceeds to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination processing (step S63; N)
Shifts to step S41 of FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing of the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, RAM clear start address 1
After setting (step S25), it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not on (step S64; N), a setting change command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited.

If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This shift determination process is the same process as step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination process (step S66; Y),
In order to perform the initialization process of the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state, the process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition determination process]
FIG. 40 shows the shift determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modified example, a staff member can shift to a probability set value changing state by inserting game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32. The state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input determines whether this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the shift determination process ends. As a result, the state is changed to the probability setting value changing state.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). Then, when the shift standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the shift standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the shift determination process ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, in the case where the backed up data is normal, in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, step S in FIG.
41, and if the backed up data is abnormal, step S
28 and S29 are performed, and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area in any order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only the detection is performed by the detection unit, or that the detection is performed a plurality of times in a predetermined manner (the number of detections, the detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor of the winning area is used as the detection means used for establishing the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a prize area detection sensor.

In addition, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to establish the transition condition, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and it may be used as a detecting means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be established by a password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value changing state by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition. At times, even if the set value change switch 151 is not in the ON state, it is possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and enable the transition to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. It is also possible to start the period for monitoring the establishment of.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning a prize switch 35a,
The start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are set to the operation unit (the setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), A setting means (game control device 100) is provided which enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. If it is detected, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed.
Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

Also, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, the game machine is capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is given to the player. A plurality of detecting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a), and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is configured to enable selection of the probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. . Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means enables selection of the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of detecting means are inoperable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value is changed by the setting value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch that constitutes the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as the set value change operation unit, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether or not the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value can be set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

By using the DIP switch as described above, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the probability setting values that have been set can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover for covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be lit at all times, or may be lit only in the probability set value changing state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, the set value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, as long as it is possible to grasp the probability set value by visually observing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Also, the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152.
As in the third modified example described above, the state may be changed to the probability setting value changing state depending on the state of the setting value changing switch 151, and the probability setting value changing state may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirm operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

When the probability setting value change state is not set, the probability setting value currently set is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure variation display game is started.
Alternatively, it may be periodically performed at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it may be notified that an abnormality has occurred, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a setting key switch 152 and a CP for making the probability setting value changeable.
If the wiring between U111A and the U111A is broken, the game cannot be played.

In this modified example, a setting sub-board that serves as setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, and a probability setting value display device 153 is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It is like this. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Connected with. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed so that the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and it is recognized that the input from the setting key switch 152 is off. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game is allowed to proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED serving as a confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152 is provided. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A becomes HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 forms the specific operation information that is input based on the operation of the operation unit to be in the specific state, and based on the input of the specific operation information. The state is changed to the probability setting value in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability setting value changing state, the game cannot be advanced, and by ending the probability setting value changing state, the game can be advanced.

43C shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43D shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in any case
The input to 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability setting value is changeable, the specific operation information is input also in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, since the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of abnormality.
Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 has been described, but the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, the setting sub-board that constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like is the game control device 10.
Although it is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like and the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100. In this case also, the setting is made by the same configuration. It is possible to detect disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be input. The setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and a probability setting value, which is connected to the control unit and to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, is set in the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting unit (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and is operated so that the operation unit enters a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means advances the game while the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

In addition, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if a game is being played (step S433; Y
), The off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434;
N) sets the off-state confirmation flag (step S473), and ends the probability set value confirmation process. The off-state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472),
The process after step S435 is performed, and the mode is shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no off-state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. That is, when the setting key switch is in the on state during the game and is not in the game state, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted, and the setting key switch is in the off state in the non-game state. When the state is changed to the on state, the mode is switched to the probability set value confirmation mode.

In this way, by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the on state during the game, it is not possible to switch to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the player is not in the game state (state not in prohibition state) after that and the setting key switch is turned on without doing so. .. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100), the control means (game control device 100)
) Is controlled by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (
The confirmation state is set only when the state of the setting key switch 152)) is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is provided with a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and a set value changing button forming the second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. The RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, if the RAM clear switch is in the on state (the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is,
The RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (is in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processing from step S412 is executed to confirm the selected probability setting value. To do.

In this way, by turning on the power with the RAM clear button pressed, the RAM 111
Since the initialization of C can be performed and the probability setting value can be confirmed by the RAM clear button, the work of initializing the RAM and the confirmation of the probability setting value can be selected using the minimum operation unit. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value change state is set and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to perform only the initialization of the RAM without shifting to the state, it may be necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value changing state when only the initialization of the RAM is desired. Without, it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM.
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) of the clear button (RAM clear switch) is operated In addition, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized. By operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)), the second
Setting means (game control device) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) 100), storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means including information on the probability setting value selected by the setting means, the front of the game machine 10, and the closed state. An open state is provided with a main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into an open state and open / close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the main body frame. If it is detected by the opening / closing detection means, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation portion is operated, the probability setting value is changed and the storage means is initialized. Thus, if the opening / closing detection means detects that the main body frame is in the open state, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operating portion is operated, the probability setting value can be changed. This means that the storage means is initialized without setting the state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the operation of changing the probability setting value when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, and the work efficiency in the game shop can be improved.

Further, the control means detects that the main body frame is in the open state by the opening / closing detection means, and
When the power of the game machine is turned on while the operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability setting value is changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body frame is closed. If the state is detected by the opening / closing detection means, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability setting value can be changed. Instead, the storage means is initialized. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value changing state, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game shop. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation section is operated, the state does not shift to the probability set value changing state, and thus fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, the state of the setting key switch is set prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch so that even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value change state is entered. However, the setting key switch is on and the RAM
The state in which the clear switch is in the on state may be used as the condition for shifting to the probability setting value changing state.
By making the operation of the plurality of operating units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value changing state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment which does not include the RAM clear button, the open / close detection means detects that the main body frame is in the open state, and the set key operation unit and the set value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the opening / closing detection means detects that the main body frame is closed, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the probability setting value is not changed and the storage means is initialized. It can be said that In this case as well, the condition that the setting key switch is in the ON state and the setting value change switch is in the ON state may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. In addition, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

Note that the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be replaced with each other in FIG. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 is performed, the probability setting value to be selected is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing from step S412 is performed. Alternatively, the process of confirming the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of the present modification is different in the probability setting value determination operation.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, when the setting value changing switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes from step S407 are performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the setting value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing from step S412 is performed, and the processing to determine the selected probability setting value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is finished within less than a predetermined time, and there is the first input mode when the pressing is finished. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is changed when the pressing operation is performed for a short time and the setting value change button is released (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned off). The reason why the set value change button is released is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is terminated for a predetermined time or more, and there is the second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is set when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding the specified time (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or longer).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. The operations of changing and confirming the set value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved.
Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced. It should be noted that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operations as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100), the predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) When the power of the game machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM1
11C) can be initialized, and by operating a predetermined operation unit,
The selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, if the game is not in progress (step S433; N
), It is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). When a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated and the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted.

The predetermined abnormality can be arbitrarily set, but here, it is illegal magnets, board radio waves, frame radio waves, general electric charges, and special winning holes. When any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that the predetermined abnormality is occurring. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent acts.If such abnormalities occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent that.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of a connector disconnection or the like are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the set value changing button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside so that the gaming shop side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known before the staff member confirms the occurrence of the abnormality.

Note that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or the probability setting value confirmation mode is started to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the gaming machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the security signal being output for a predetermined time.

Also, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability set value confirmation mode.However, when the predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the ON state is maintained, the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered from that point. By doing so, it is possible to automatically confirm the probability setting value if all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modified example described above, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in the state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and the predetermined abnormality is being generated (step S501; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared.

In this way, it is prohibited to switch to the probability set value confirmation mode by not switching to the probability set value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the ON state from the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in the state where the predetermined abnormality that is the state has occurred, then all the predetermined abnormalities are cleared (state not in the prohibited state), and the probability set value It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is operated to operate to a predetermined value. Based on the state, it is possible to make a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and when the game state controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Means that even if the operation unit is in a predetermined state, the confirmation state is not set.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being displayed.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormality, the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and if any of the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the predetermined abnormality is detected. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all are eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and also to the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is indicated. This can prevent inconvenience.

Further, it is provided with a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game, and the control means, when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started, provides the specific external information for a predetermined period. It is supposed to output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, the setting means, when the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation section is set to the predetermined state,
When all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, it means that the confirmation state is set based on the elimination of all the predetermined abnormalities. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the predetermined abnormality has not occurred, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the setting means is configured to enter the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if the setting key switch is in the ON state (
In step S434; Y), it is determined whether a game is being played (step S511). When not playing the game (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is being played (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S511).
512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is suspended during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Also, after performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, restarting the game is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. The confirmation process ends. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be restarted.

In the state where the game is suspended, the display of the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the suspension may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal figure variable display game, the variable display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. In addition, the collective display device 50 may display a display indicating that it is in an interrupted state.

In addition, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is restarted, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. The effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable accessory. Further, the display and the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display and the like on the display device 41 when the power is restored.

In addition, even if the game is interrupted, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning opening 3
5 and the special variable winning device 38 may be won or invalidated. Also,
The payout of the game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[Eleventh Modification]
Next, an eleventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example outputs the sound accompanying the change of the probability setting value.

FIG. 50A shows an example in which the probability setting value is changed. When the power of the gaming machine is in the off state, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to set the setting key switch to the on state (t11), and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the setting is performed. The value is changed (t12). Based on the setting value changing state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 informs that the probability setting value is changing based on the reception of this command. Output the change notification sound. Any voice may be used as the notification voice during change, but for example, a voice "probability setting value is being changed", a specific music or an alarm sound may be used. Further, the probability setting value change state is also notified by the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "Probability setting value is being changed". That is, the production device used in the game is used to notify that the probability setting value is being changed. By notifying using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is being changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the staff of the game store and the surrounding This can be noticed by the player and can prevent illegal games from being played.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to bring the setting key switch into the off state, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300.
Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 outputs the probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the probability setting value set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

Any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification sound, but a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the sound "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other voices may be used, or specific music or alarm sound may be used. Further, the display device 41 also performs display according to the probability setting value that is similarly set. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

In addition to this, the probability setting value is informed that the display of the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 correspond to the set probability setting value. You may do it. That is, the probability setting value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. In this way, by using the effect device to inform, it is possible to clearly inform that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the salesclerk of the amusement store and the surrounding games. This can be noticed by a person, and an illegal game can be prevented from being played.

When the probability setting value is in the changed state, external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, it is possible for the amusement store side to immediately understand the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability setting value changing state. Further, the probability set value notification voice may be output for a period in which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced. In addition, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, it is determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is the speaker 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 4.
6, it may be notified by a production device such as the board production device 44.

Further, each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation in the probability setting value changing state, a sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. In addition, other production devices may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. Thereby, the selected probability setting value can be easily confirmed.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player Control means for performing control (game control device 100) and setting means for making it possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (game control). Device 100) and an effect device (speaker 19a) for effecting a game.
, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board rendering device 44), and the selected probability setting value can be notified by the rendering device. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity. Also, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be confirmed.

Further, after the probability setting value change state is finished, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced.

[Twelfth Modification]
Next, a twelfth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the game machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponing function, an initial setting canceling function, an output ON holding function, and an output OFF holding function.
FIG. 51A shows an internal circuit and a connection diagram of the magnetic sensor 61 in the present modification.
The magnetic sensor 61 detects a magnetic state in the arrangement environment and detects fraudulent behavior (magnet fraud) caused by a magnet or radio waves. The magnetic sensor 61 is installed, for example, such that the distance from the surface (the surface on the player side) of the cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 to the detection surface of the magnetic sensor 61 is 40 mm to 60 mm.

The magnetic sensor 61 has a SEL-IN terminal as shown in FIG. 51A, for example, and the sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is set by the value of the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 can switch the sensitivity in a plurality of stages (for example, four stages). The sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is selected by the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal, is set at the time of initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61, and is internally held until the power is cut off. Is not allowed.
The SEL-IN terminal is connected to GND via a resistance value corresponding to the sensitivity used (that is, via the resistor Rd). The GND to which the resistor Rd is connected is the GND of the magnetic sensor 61.
(I.e., the GND connected to the GND terminal of the magnetic sensor 61).

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 is provided with a magnetic sensor main circuit 61a for performing detection of a magnetic state and determination of occurrence of abnormality, for example, as shown in FIG.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a includes a circuit for detecting magnetism, a reference magnetic state storage unit for storing the magnetic state in the environment where the magnetic sensor 61 is placed as a reference magnetic state, and a reference magnetic state for instructing to start storing the reference magnetic state. The state memory command means is compared with the reference magnetic state and the magnetic state in the environment where the magnetic sensor 61 is currently arranged, and when a difference outside the predetermined allowable range is detected, it is detected that abnormal magnetism has occurred. An abnormal signal output means for outputting an abnormal signal as a signal.

The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b when abnormal magnetism is detected.
Then, the OUT terminal is turned on. When the abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected), the output transistor 61b is turned on and the OUT terminal is turned off. As a result, the game control device 100 can detect whether or not abnormal magnetism is detected depending on the state of the OUT terminal of the magnetic sensor 61. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 constitutes an abnormal magnetism detecting means for detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism.
Here, "abnormal magnetism" is generated, for example, by approach of a magnet or emission of a radio wave. If abnormal magnetism is generated, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts (magnet fraud) are being performed. It is in a high state.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 61 performs an initial setting (calibration) operation for storing the reference magnetic state based on the turning on of the game machine 10. In the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, when the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value, the reference magnetic state storage command means in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a stores the reference magnetic state in the reference magnetic state storage means. It is started by instructing the start of.
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting function for performing an initial setting (calibration) operation in order to correct the influence of the peripheral magnetism. By this initial setting operation, the detection area is automatically adjusted, and the automatically adjusted set value is internally held until the power is turned off. The initialization operation requires, for example, a maximum time of 1.5 seconds. Driving an electric drive source such as a solenoid or motor or bringing a magnet close to it during the initial setting operation causes the detection area to change due to the influence of magnetism.Therefore, from the start to the end of the initial setting operation. Care must be taken not to be affected by magnetism.

From the above, the magnetic sensor 61 (abnormal magnetic detection means) includes the reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the environment where the magnetic sensor 61 is arranged as the reference magnetic state, and the reference magnetic state and the magnetic sensor 61 at the present time. Abnormal signal output that outputs an abnormal signal as a detection signal to the game control device 100 as an abnormal magnetism when a difference outside the predetermined allowable range is detected by comparing the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of And the reference magnetic state storage means starts storing the reference magnetic state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.
By including such a magnetic sensor 61, it becomes possible to set the magnetic state as a reference according to the installation environment of each gaming machine in the gaming shop, in addition to the difference between the models, and more accurate fraud detection can be performed. You can Further, the reference magnetic state storage means starts storing the reference magnetic state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Therefore, even if the reference magnetic state changes due to movement of the gaming machine or renovation of the game store, it is possible to cope with the change. It is possible to always perform accurate fraud detection.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has a DOOR-IN input terminal (door signal input terminal) as shown in FIG. 51A, for example, and a signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Hi. In the state, the magnetic sensor 61 is configured not to function.
The initial setting operation when the power is turned on includes the condition that power is supplied to the magnetic sensor 61,
It is executed when both of the conditions that the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state are satisfied.
Therefore, when the door signal is in the low state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is immediately started (see FIG. 52 (a)).
On the other hand, when the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the door signal is Lo.
After entering the w state, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is started (see FIG. 52B).
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponing function that executes an initial setting operation after the door signal is in the Low state when the door signal is not in the Low state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting stop function for stopping the initial setting operation when the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation. Then, when the initial setting operation is stopped, the initial setting operation is restarted when the door signal becomes the Low state again while the power supply to the magnetic sensor 61 is maintained.
Further, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b in the ON state (that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected (when the door magnet signal is in the Hi state after the initial setting operation is normally performed). It has an output ON holding function to hold the same state (when detected) (see FIG. 52 (
See a) and (b)).
In addition, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b in the OFF state when the initial setting operation cannot be normally performed due to the influence of the magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61 (that is, the same state as when the abnormal magnetism is detected). It has an output OFF holding function for holding the output OFF (see FIG. 52 (c)). In order to cancel the output OFF state of the output transistor 61b, it is necessary to cut off the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 once and restart it while considering the influence of the surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

Initialization delay function, initial setting cancellation function, output ON holding function and output O of the magnetic sensor 61
Details of the FF holding function will be described with reference to the operation chart shown in FIG. Note that FIG.
The “initial setting time” in 2 is the time from when the magnetic sensor 61 is powered on until the detection state is accurately output.
In FIG. 52 (a), when the door is in the closed state (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the closed state), the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the initial setting is normally performed. An example is shown.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a starts the initial setting operation at the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t21). The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t22). In addition, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is provided between the power-on of the gaming machine 10 and the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22).
) Holds the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected)).

When the door signal is in the Hi state during the initialization operation, the initialization cancellation function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a stops the initial setting operation, for example, when the door signal is in the Hi state from the start to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22). The door signal becomes the low state again, and the low state of the door signal is maintained until the initialization operation is completed, whereby the initialization operation is completed for the first time. The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a
Even when the initial setting operation is stopped, the output transistor 61b is held in the output ON state from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22).

After the initialization operation is completed, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Hi.
In the case of the state, the output ON holding function is executed (t23 to t25, t26 to t2.
9). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the door open (t23 to t2) while the door is open.
(4, t26 to t28) and the output transistor 61b is kept in the output ON state until the predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed (t24 to t25, t28 to t29). To do.
At the time (t31) when abnormal magnetism is detected, the output transistor 61b is turned off,
When the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected (t32), the output transistor 61b returns to the ON state. However, since the output transistor 61b holds the output ON state during the execution of the output ON holding function, when the abnormal magnetism is detected during the execution of the output ON holding function (t26 to t29), the output transistor 61b. Does not turn off when abnormal magnetism is detected (t27), but turns off when execution of the output ON holding function ends (t29).

In FIG. 52 (b), after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on when the door is in the open state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is in the open state), the door is in the closed state (the front frame 12 and the glass frame). An example of an operation chart when both the frames 15 are in the closed state and the initial setting is normally performed is shown.
When the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting postponing function is executed (t41 to t43). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is used when the door signal is in the Hi state at the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t41). Starts the initial setting operation at a time point (t43) when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door signal is in the Low state. The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t44). In addition, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61
a is the output ON state of the output transistor 61b (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected)) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44). Keep the same state).

When the door signal is in the Hi state during the initialization operation, the initialization cancellation function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, for example, when the door signal is in the Hi state during the period from the door signal being in the Low state to the end of the initial setting operation (t42 to t44), Cancel the initial setting operation. The door signal becomes the low state again, and the low state of the door signal is maintained until the initialization operation is completed, whereby the initialization operation is completed for the first time.
Even when the initial setting operation is stopped, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a outputs the output transistor 6 from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44).
1b is held in the output ON state.
After the initial setting operation is completed, when the door signal is in the Hi state, the output ON holding function is executed (t45 to t47, t48 to t51).

In FIG. 52 (c), when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting becomes abnormal, and the door is opened. Status(
After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on when at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open, the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), An example of an operation chart when the initial setting becomes abnormal is shown.
When the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the output OFF holding function is executed (t62 to t68, t72 to t77). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61
In a, for example, the detection area is automatically adjusted in the initial setting operation. However, if the automatic adjustment cannot be normally performed due to the influence of the magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61, the initial setting operation ends. Until the magnetic sensor 61 is powered off (t62 to t68, t72 to t77)
, The output transistor 61b is kept in the output OFF state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is detected).

That is, when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal, as in the case of detecting abnormal magnetism. As a result, since the magnetic error is notified, it is possible to let the clerk of the gaming shop recognize that the malfunction has occurred. In this case, the salesclerk of the game shop outputs the output OF because the magnetic error is reported even though the magnet is not illegally operated.
It is determined that the F hold function is being executed, and in order to cancel the execution of the output OFF hold function, the power of the gaming machine 10 is once shut off while considering the influence of the surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally. And then turn it on again.

As shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B, in order to use the initial setting postponing function, the initial setting canceling function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61, a signal () input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is used. It is necessary to switch the door signal) between the Low state and the Hi state. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the DOOR-IN input terminal is connected to the door (the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15).
By connecting to GND through a transistor Tr which is turned on / off according to the opening / closing of, the initial setting postponing function, the initial setting canceling function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 can be used.

The transistor Tr serves as a switching unit that switches between connection and non-connection between the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND. Specifically, the transistor Tr is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), and the DOOR-IN input terminal and G are turned on.
The ND and the ND are connected, and when the door is in the open state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is in the open state), the OFF state is set and the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND are disconnected. .
Therefore, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state because the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND are in the connected state when the door is in the closed state, and is in the DOOR- state when the door is in the open state. Since the IN input terminal and the GND are not connected, the Hi state is set.

The DOOR-IN input terminal is a terminal used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism.
That is, the initial setting postponing function, the initial setting canceling function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are functions used to reduce the influence of the peripheral magnetism.
For example, when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is executed when the door is in the open state, there is a possibility that the ambient magnetic field environment may deviate between the initial setting state and the use state. By executing the function or the initial setting cancel function so that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not performed when the door is opened, it is possible to avoid such a deviation.
Further, for example, when a detection signal (abnormal signal) is output from the magnetic sensor 61 when the door is in the open state, the detection signal may be a detection signal due to a change in the surrounding magnetic field environment due to the opening and closing of the door. There is. That is, although there is a risk that a detection signal (abnormal signal) will be output even if the magnet is not illegally operated, the output ON holding function is executed to output the detection signal (abnormal signal) when the door is opened. By canceling, it is possible to avoid false fraud detection.

However, when the initial setting postponing function or the initial setting canceling function is executed, the initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61 is performed while the door is in the open state and before the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. Since the operation is not executed, there is a problem that it takes time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 until the game can be played.
Further, when the output ON holding function is executed, the magnet fraud is detected while the door is in the open state and before the predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. Since the output of the detection signal (abnormality signal) is canceled, magnet fraud is performed while the door is in the open state or until the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. There's a problem.
Therefore, in the present modification, in order to solve these problems, the initialization delay function, initialization cancellation function, and output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are disabled.

Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in, for example, FIG. 51A, the DOOR-IN input terminal is directly connected to the GND, and thus the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal. Is always in the low state and does not switch to the high state. That is, in this modification,
By directly connecting the DOOR-IN input terminal to GND, the initial setting postponing function, the initial setting canceling function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are invalidated.
Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the magnetic sensor 61 of the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on regardless of whether or not the door is opened when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When the initial setting operation starts (t81) and the initial setting operation ends, the magnetic sensor 6
The monitoring of the magnetic abnormality by 1 becomes effective (t82). On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, monitoring of the radio wave abnormality by the board radio wave sensor 62 and the frame radio wave sensor (not shown) becomes effective (
t81). Therefore, while the magnetic sensor 61 is in the initial setting operation, it is possible to detect radio wave fraud,
Magnet fraud cannot be detected. Therefore, there is a possibility that the magnet is illegally operated while the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is being performed.

Therefore, in this modification, in order to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, for example, as shown in FIG. Made it possible to do.
The process related to the probability setting value is a process performed according to the operation of the clerk of the game shop. That is, while the process related to the probability setting value is being performed, there is a store clerk near the gaming machine, and thus fraudulent acts are unlikely to be performed. Therefore, by enabling the process related to the probability setting value to be performed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIGS. 54 to 55 instead of the main processing shown in FIGS. In this main processing, the processing related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) is performed instead of the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12).
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, after the power-on delay timer times out (for example, 3 seconds after power-on), the processing from step S13 onward is performed. Therefore, the processes after step S13 are performed after the initial setting operation (within 1.5 seconds) of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed.
In the main processing shown in FIG. 54 to FIG. 55, the processing from step S48 is performed after the calibration timer times out (for example, 1.5 seconds after the power is turned on). Therefore, the processing executed before step S48 is executed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, the game control device 100 sets an initial value to the calibration timer immediately after the process of step S6 (step S91) and starts updating the calibration timer. (Step S92), the process proceeds to step S8. By the process of step S92, the process of updating the calibration timer (for example, -1 update) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).
Then, as shown in FIG. 55, for example, immediately before the process of step S48, it is determined whether or not the calibration timer has timed out (step S93), and when it is determined that the time has not expired (step S93; N). Repeats the process of step S93. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is up (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S48.

In the case of the present modification, the initialization operation of the magnetic sensor 61 requires a maximum time of 1.5 seconds, so in step S91 a value equivalent to 1.5 seconds is set as the initial value. This allows
When the calibration timer times out, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is surely completed.
In this way, the processing relating to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12)
Instead of the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93), during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, a process related to a probability setting value (a process for shifting to a probability setting value changing state (step S37). It is possible to perform a predetermined game control process (e.g., steps S1 to S47) including (S40 to S40). As a result, the magnetic sensor 61
Since a predetermined game control process including a process related to the probability setting value is executed in parallel with the initial setting operation, the time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 until the game can be started can be shortened. Further, since the process relating to the probability setting value can be executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

In addition, the command (command at the time of power failure recovery) transmitted to the performance control device 300 during the updating of the calibration timer (that is, from the setting of the initial value to the calibration timer to the expiration of the calibration timer). (Step S34), command for changing probability setting (Step S40), command for RAM initialization (Step S44)
Etc.) or the command transmitted to the payout control device 200 may be transmitted when the calibration timer times out. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands.

Also, it is determined that the calibration timer has timed out (step S93; Y).
After that, a command for notifying the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 can drive the electric drive source such as the solenoid or the motor after confirming that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed. That is, since it is possible to control the electric drive source so as not to be driven during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to prevent the electric drive source from affecting the storage of the reference magnetic state. it can. It should be noted that during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, only the driving of the electric driving source having a low driving frequency is prohibited, and the electric driving source having a high driving frequency such as a motor which is constantly driven is the magnetic sensor 61. It may be driven during the initial setting operation.

Also, the launch of a game ball may affect the memory of the reference magnetic state. However, in the present modification, the launch of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Specifically, in step S5 of the main process, a signal to stop firing is output, and then, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 4), the output process (step S104) is performed to output a signal to permit firing, and to permit firing. The signal can be set to the permission state. Then, in this modification, a process of permitting an interrupt after the calibration timer has timed out (step S
48), the timer interrupt process is not executed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Therefore, in this modification, since the launch of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the launch of the game ball does not affect the memory of the reference magnetic state.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality is enabled when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the door is in the open state at the end of the initialization operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the magnetic abnormality monitoring may be enabled after the door is closed.

Of course, also in the game machine of other modified examples, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, the output O
It is possible to use the magnetic sensor 61 having the N holding function and the output OFF holding function. Further, not only in the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, but also in the main processing shown in FIGS. 36, 39, and 45, processing relating to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12)
), The process related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) can be performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when the result of the game is a special result. In other gaming machines, the calibration performed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (
When (initial setting) is suspended and a predetermined condition after power-on of the gaming machine 10 is satisfied (for example,
A magnetic sensor 61 capable of executing calibration postponement for performing calibration on the main body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) is closed, and a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. And a setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among a plurality of probability setting values, invalidate execution of calibration postponement, and set probability in parallel with calibration. It is possible to perform processing related to values (processing for shifting to the probability setting value change state (steps S37 to S40)) (
(See FIG. 53).

Therefore, since it is possible to perform the process related to the probability setting value in parallel with the calibration, it is possible to suppress magnetic irregularity (illegal magnetism) that is aimed during the calibration of the magnetic sensor 61.
In addition, it is possible to perform the process related to the probability setting value in parallel with the calibration, and the execution of the deferral of the calibration is disabled (that is, the power is turned on regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not). Since the calibration is sometimes executed), compared with the case where the process related to the probability setting value is performed after the calibration or the case where the execution of the calibration is waited until the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 until the game can be played can be shortened.
It should be noted that when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is not limited to the case where the main body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) are closed, and can be appropriately changed.

Further, the process related to the probability setting value that can be executed in parallel with the calibration is not limited to the process for shifting to the probability setting value changing state (steps S37 to S40).
Specifically, for example, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to execute a process (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value changing state as a process related to the probability set value, and at the same time, set the probability set value. Probability setting value changing process (step S108)
The process corresponding to may be executable.
Further, it is also possible not to execute both the processing relating to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12) and the processing relating to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93). In this case, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, a part of the main processing (FIG. 54 to FIG. 55) (predetermined game control processing (eg, step S1 to step S1)
In addition to (S47)), the rest of the main processing (for example, steps S48 to S59) and timer interrupt processing (FIG. 4) can be performed. As a result, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the processing for shifting to the probability setting value change state (steps S37 to S40) can be executed as the processing for the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is set as the probability setting value. The set value changing process (step S108) can be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is provided with a radio wave sensor (a board radio wave sensor 62 or a frame radio wave sensor (not shown)). When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, radio wave monitoring by the radio wave sensor is started and calibration is performed. The magnetic sensor 61 may be configured to start monitoring for magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) at the end (see FIG. 53).
With this configuration, it is possible to monitor radio wave fraud concurrently with calibration.

《Notification》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) can execute a plurality of types of notifications. Specifically, for example, a volume notification for reporting the current volume, a current brightness (LE
For example, a brightness notification for notifying D or the brightness of the liquid crystal, an error notification for notifying occurrence of a predetermined error, an instruction notification for notifying a predetermined instruction to the player, and the like are possible.

In the sound volume notification, for example, a sound volume image G11 indicating the current sound volume value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the sound volume changing operation by the player is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. The volume image G11 can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), while the decorative special symbol (identification information) is being changed or displayed on the customer waiting demo screen, but the decorative special symbol (identification information) is not displayed. It cannot be displayed during stop display or power failure recovery screen.
In the brightness notification, for example, a brightness image for notifying the current brightness value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the brightness changing operation by the player is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 56A, for example, the brightness image can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special symbol or the display of the customer waiting demo screen as in the volume image G11, but the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It cannot be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
That is, during the variable display period of the decorative special symbol and the display period of the customer waiting demo screen, the volume image G is displayed.
11 is a displayable period during which the luminance image can be displayed, and the display period of the decorative special symbol stop display and the power failure recovery screen is a non-displayable period during which the volume image G11 and the luminance image cannot be displayed (non-display period). Is.

56 (b) to (e), FIG. 57, and FIG. 58 show an example of the volume notification. Since the same processing as that of the volume notification is performed in the brightness notification, description of the brightness notification will be omitted using the drawings.
The sound volume can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, 5 steps of 1 to 5) by performing a sound volume changing operation using a predetermined operation means (for example, a cross key not shown). The volume changing operation includes an increasing operation for increasing the volume and a decreasing operation for decreasing the volume, which are different operations.

FIG. 57 shows a timing chart in the case where a short press operation is performed as the volume changing operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs the volume changing operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume changing operation (t10).
Adjust the volume in 1). Here, since the increasing operation is performed as the volume changing operation, the volume is increased by one step (from 3 to 4). In addition, the volume image G11 for notifying the current volume (volume after change) is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume (FIG. 56). (See (b) to (c)).

Next, the effect control device 300 deletes the volume image G11 at a time point (t103) when a predetermined volume image display time has elapsed since the volume change operation was detected.
However, the volume image G11 cannot be displayed during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped before the predetermined volume image display time has elapsed, the volume image G11 is erased when the variable display is stopped. On the other hand, the operation sound corresponding to the volume changing operation (for example, the sound "picone") is output until the operation sound is completed even when the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle of the operation sound. .

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started during the period from the detection of the volume change operation until the predetermined volume image display time elapses (t104 to t107). At the time point (t105) when the stop display is started, the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G
The display of 11 is stopped, but the output of the operation sound is not stopped (see FIGS. 56D to 56E). This allows the player to recognize that the volume change operation has been normally accepted.
That is, when the display time of the volume image G11 is shorter than usual, the player may feel uneasy that the volume changing operation has not been normally accepted. However, in the case of the present embodiment, the volume image G11. Even if the display time is shorter than usual, the operation sound output time does not change from normal (that is, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption), so the player can accept the volume change operation and change the volume. It is possible to recognize that (volume adjustment) has been performed.
The same applies to the case of brightness notification. That is, if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped before the predetermined brightness image display time elapses after the brightness change operation is detected, the display of the brightness image is stopped when the variable display is stopped. The operation sound output is not stopped.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs the volume changing operation during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the effect control device 300 detects the volume changing operation (t108) and outputs the volume. The image G11 is not displayed, the operation sound is not output, and the volume is not adjusted.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the volume changing operation is detected again (t112 to t113) until the predetermined volume image display time elapses after the volume changing operation is detected (t112).
In this case, the effect control device 300 resets the count of the volume image display time when the volume change operation is detected again. Therefore, the volume image G11 is not erased at the time (t113) when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the previous volume change operation has elapsed, and the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last volume change operation has elapsed. It is erased at the time (t115).
Moreover, when the volume control operation is detected when the volume is at the upper limit (or the lower limit), the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11, but does not output the operation sound or adjust the volume.

FIG. 58 shows a timing chart when a long press operation is performed as the volume changing operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the player performs the volume changing operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume changing operation (t12).
In 1), the volume is adjusted and the volume image G11 for notifying the current volume is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume changing operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, the volume change operation is a long press operation (for example, a press operation that is longer than the output time of the operation sound).
If it is, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume in a predetermined time period (t123, t1).
25) In addition, the operation sound is output according to the volume adjustment, and the volume image G11 is updated and displayed according to the volume adjustment.

Next, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 stops the display of the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display is started (t126). , Output of operation sound is not stopped.
Further, the effect control device 300 does not display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, or adjust the volume even if the volume changing operation is detected during the stop display of the decorative special symbol. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, even when the player's volume changing operation (long-pressing operation) is continued during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the display of the volume image G11, the output of the operation sound, and the adjustment of the volume are performed. Is not done.

Next, when the variable display of the decorative special symbol is started during the volume change operation (long-press operation), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume at the time when the variable display is started (t128), and is currently The volume image G11 for notifying the volume is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the volume changing operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, when the volume changing operation (long-pressing operation) ends (t130), the effect control device 300.
Is a time point (t) at which a predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the volume detection operation last detected has elapsed.
In 131), the volume image G11 is erased.
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the volume control operation is detected when the volume is at the upper limit (or the lower limit), the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11, but outputs the operation sound. And the volume is not adjusted (t129 to t130).

On the other hand, in the error notification, for example, an error image G12 that notifies the content of the error is displayed on the display device 41. The error image G12 can be displayed not only while the decorative special symbol (identification information) is being changed and displayed on the customer waiting demo screen as shown in FIG. 56 (a), but also the decorative special symbol (identification information). ) Can be displayed even while the stop display and the power failure recovery screen are displayed.
Here, the errors mainly include the following. For example, a switch abnormality error indicating a disconnection of a switch connector, a shoot ball out error indicating that there is no game ball to be paid out, an overflow error indicating that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out, Examples include a payout abnormality error indicating that the payout control device 200 is abnormal, a front frame opening error indicating that the glass frame 15 is open, and a gaming machine frame opening error indicating that the front frame 12 is open. .

Further, a frame radio wave error indicating that the front frame 12 has detected an abnormal radio wave, a board radio error indicating that the game board 30 has detected an abnormal radio wave, a magnetic error indicating that an abnormal magnetism has been detected, a special fluctuation Large winning opening fraud error indicating that an illegal prize to the prize winning device 38 has been detected, ordinary electric fraud error indicating that an illegal prize to the ordinary variation prize winning device 37 has been detected, and vibration of a certain intensity or higher has been detected. A vibration error indicating is also included as an error. In particular, in the case of a gaming machine, which performs a distribution of whether or not to pass a specific area in the variable winning device, and when the game ball passes the specific area, a vibration error is monitored in the case of a gaming machine. Often, the game machines other than this may be monitored.

Also, a right-handing error indicating that right-handing has been detected in the game state where left-handing should be performed,
A left-handed hitting error indicating that a left-handed hit has been detected in a game state where a right-handed hit should be made is also an error. Regarding this right-handed error and left-handed error, the performance control device 300 monitors the establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the notification of the error without transmitting a command indicating that the error has been resolved from the game control device 100, The abnormality notification is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

In the instruction notification, for example, an instruction image for informing the content of the instruction is displayed on the display device 41. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the instruction image can be displayed not only while the decorative special symbol is being changed or displayed on the customer waiting demo screen as in the error image G12, but also when the decorative special symbol is stopped. It can be displayed even during the display or the power failure recovery screen.
Here, as the instruction, for example, a hitting instruction such as a left-handing instruction for instructing left-handing in a gaming state in which left-handing is required, or a right-handing instruction for instructing right-handing in a gaming state in which right-handing is required, etc. Is mentioned.
That is, the variable display period of the decorative special symbol, the stop display period of the decorative special symbol, the display period of the customer waiting demo screen, and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are displayable periods in which the error image G12 and the instruction image can be displayed.

56 (f) to (h) show an example of error notification. Note that since the instruction notification performs the same processing as the error notification, description of the instruction notification will be omitted using the drawings.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (f) to (g), when the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened during the variable display of the decorative special pattern (identification information), an error (here, a front frame opening error or a game) An error image G12 for notifying a machine frame opening error) is displayed on the display device 41. Error image G1
2 is erased, for example, when the corresponding error is eliminated.

The error image G12 can be displayed even when the decorative special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), for example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (h), the error image G12 is
Even when the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped on the way, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved. Similarly, in the case of the instruction image, even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped halfway, the instruction image is not erased and is continuously displayed until the display period of the instruction image ends.
56 (f) to (h) exemplify a case where an error occurs during the variable display of the decorative special symbol, but similarly, when an error occurs during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, The error image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and is erased when the error is not detected.

Thus, rather than the notification image in the volume notification or the brightness notification (the volume image G11 or the brightness image; hereinafter referred to as the “first notification image”), the notification image in the error notification or the instruction notification (the error image G12 or the instruction image. The “second notification image”) has a longer displayable period. This is because the error notification and the instruction notification are more important than the volume notification and the brightness notification.
On the other hand, the decorative special symbol is variably displayed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and stopped and displayed at the end of the special figure variation display game. That is, the decoration special symbol (stop symbol) that is being stopped is
Since the result of the special figure variation display game is informed, the decoration special symbol in the stop display is more interested in the player than the decoration special symbol in the variable display. Of the screens displayed when power is restored, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the customer waiting state is restarted due to power restoration. Of these, the power failure recovery screen is the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game interrupted by power shutdown) and special game state (power is shut off during the special figure variation display game or the special game state) due to power restoration. This is displayed when resuming the special game state which was interrupted by power shutdown. That is, the power failure recovery screen is
Special figure fluctuation display This is displayed when a power failure occurs during the game or in the special gaming state, and informs that the power failure has been restored. I am very interested.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen that are of high interest to the player as much as possible, the first notification image of low importance is displayed during the stop display of the decoration special symbol or the power failure. It is not displayed while the recovery screen is displayed. Specifically, while the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) can be displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen, the first notification image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) It is not displayed together with the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen. That is, by adding the priority to be displayed in the notification image, the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure restoration screen should be displayed even while hindering the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure restoration screen, and the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure restoration screen is disturbed. It is possible to distinguish from a notification image that should not be displayed. Therefore, the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen will be secured as much as possible, so that it is possible to expect an improvement in playability and the notification image (second notification image) in the error notification and the instruction notification is the stop of the decorative special symbol. Since it can be displayed even during the display or during the power failure recovery screen, it is difficult for an error (including fraud) to occur, and even if an error occurs, it is possible to take immediate action.

Here, in the present invention, in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41,
The concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. A scenario is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) for display effects such as a design effect such as background scenario, left symbol scenario, right symbol scenario, ... This is a method of generating a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as a scenario, and combining all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element, such as background, left design, right design, ... It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present invention, the display elements (display constituent elements) used in the effect of the display device 41 are “background”, “left symbol”, “right symbol”, “middle symbol”, “notice 1 character”, “notice 2”. It is divided into eight elements: "character", "holding display (decorative special figure starting memory display)", and "small design".
Then, a scenario table is created for each of a plurality of display elements in a display effect such as a variable effect. In the present invention, the scenario table, "scenario table of background control", "scenario table of left symbol control", "scenario table of right symbol control", "scenario table of middle symbol control", "notice 1 character control scenario" It is created by being divided into eight elements: a "table", a "preliminary two-character control scenario table", a "holding display control scenario table", and a "small symbol control scenario table".
In addition, each display element is configured by a display layer, and these display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layer, "background layer", "left design layer", "right design layer",
There are 12 types of "medium symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "holding layer" and "small symbol layer".

The effect control device 300, the effect display edit process of the main process (FIG. 32) (step C13).
In V, the predetermined images are displayed in the order of the number of motion management areas in the order of motion management area numbers.
A process of drawing in the virtual drawing space of the RAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 59, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas including a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in the order of the numbers of the corresponding motion management areas, and the display layer in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display edit process, the effect control device 300 first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, sets the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "notice A layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the "left pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space, and then,
If the data in the address area of the motion management area 4 is not NULL, the "right pattern layer"
Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle pattern layer" is set as the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the “notice C layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 7 is stored. Data is NU
If it is not LL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the "reserve layer" is set in the virtual drawing space. If the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the "notice E layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space, and then, When the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL. "Small design layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space Te, to end the effect display editing process.

When the data of the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so that the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL,
Since the display layer (in the case of the present invention, the “notice F layer”) is not stored in the motion management area 10 drawing area of the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326, the motion management area 10 drawing area remains blank. It should be noted that it is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, the display layers are stored while being packed forward).
In that case, the drawing area that stores the display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers that make up one display screen. Therefore, each time the display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the display layer is changed. It is necessary to search the drawing area to be stored (that is, the drawing area on the frontmost (head) side of the blank drawing areas), and the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by displaying each display layer by storing it in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers forming one display screen). Each time a layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, it is not necessary to search for a drawing area in which the display layer is stored, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in the respective drawing areas are sequentially overlapped in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas from the screen back side (lower layer side) to the screen front side (upper layer side) to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, as shown in, for example, FIG. 59, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the beginning of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest in the screen. The "small design layer", which is arranged on the side (bottom layer) and stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas, is arranged on the foremost side (top layer) of the screen. To be done.

In such an effect control, when an effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually set. By controlling all the scenarios as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios in the form of the display layer, a picture on one screen is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws a first notification image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) on a predetermined display layer as shown in FIG. 60A, and the first notification image is displayed. The second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, or the like) is drawn on the display layer on the screen front side of the drawn display layer. Specifically, for example, when the first notification image is the “notification C layer”, the second notification image is one of the “notification D layer”, the “notification E layer”, and the “notification F layer”. Is drawn to.

Therefore, when a display screen including both the first notification image and the second notification image is displayed on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 60B, for example, the second notification image (error image G12 or instruction Images, etc.) are displayed in front of the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.). Therefore, when the display area of the first notification image and the display area of the second notification image overlap, a portion of the first notification image that overlaps the second notification image is hidden by the second notification image and is not visually recognized. It will be possible. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (b), the upper part of the first notification image (volume image G11) is hidden by the second notification image (error image G12) and is invisible.

In addition, the effect control device 300, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 61A to 61C, at least one of predetermined display layers (for example, “background layer”, “notice A layer”, and “notice B layer”). A customer waiting demo screen or a power failure recovery screen is created using the display layer), and the first notification image (volume image G11 or brightness image) is displayed on the display layer on the front side of the display layer used for the customer waiting demo screen or the power failure recovery screen. Etc.) and the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.).
Therefore, when the first notification image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen, the first notification image is displayed in front of the customer waiting demo screen. When the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen, the second notification image is displayed in front of the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen. Is displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 56 (b) to (e) and FIG. 60 (b), the variable display area of the decorative special symbol and the display area of the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) overlap. But
It is not limited to this. The variable display area of the decorative special pattern and the display area of the first notification image do not have to overlap. Specifically, for example, the display area of the second notification image overlaps with the variable display area of the decorative special symbol, but the display area of the first notification image does not overlap with the variable display area of the decorative special symbol, The display area of the notification image may be set.
Further, while the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is being displayed, control for forcibly stopping the variable display of the decorative special symbol may be executed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for performing the game (decoration special figure variation display game) in which the identification information (decoration special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. As a notification corresponding to a predetermined intervention (for example, a volume changing operation, a brightness changing operation, an act that causes an error such as an illegal act, or a hitting method) for the gaming machine 10, a first notification display (first notification image (for example, a volume image) G11 or brightness image)) on the display device 41 and a second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 or instruction image)) on the display device 41.
And a notification unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing, and the first notification display is in a variable display and in a customer waiting state in which no game is being performed (for example, a customer waiting demo screen is being displayed). ), It is hidden during the stop display, and the second notification display can be displayed during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and also during the stop display (FIG. 56 (a )reference).

That is, the predetermined notification display is classified into a second notification display that can be displayed during the stop display of the identification information (decorative special pattern) and a first notification display that cannot be displayed during the stop display of the identification information. Therefore, the notification display can be suitably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol is ensured as much as possible. Specifically, for example, the notification display of low importance is set as the first notification display, and the notification display of high importance is set as the second notification display, so that the notification display of low importance is displayed together with the stop symbol. Therefore, the notification display having a low degree of importance does not interfere with the visibility of the stop symbol, and the notification display can be preferably displayed.
It should be noted that the volume image G11 (first notification display) is not limited to a meter image in which the volume value is represented by a meter value, and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a numerical image in which the volume value is represented by a numerical value. .
The first notification display is not limited to the volume image G11 and the brightness image, and can be changed as appropriate.
The second notification display is not limited to the error image G12 and the instruction image, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification display (the first notification image (for example, the volume image G11 or the brightness image)) is hidden while the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the display device 41. (See FIG. 56A).
With this configuration, it is possible to preferably display the notification display without hindering the visibility of the power failure recovery screen due to the first notification display.
In the present embodiment, the second notification display (the second notification image (for example, the error image G12 or the instruction image)) can be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is,
The second notification display may be hidden while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display screen displayed on the display device 41 is created by a plurality of stacked display layers, and the first notification display (the first notification image (for example, the volume image G11 or the brightness image) is displayed. )) And the second notification display (the second notification image (for example, the error image G12 or the instruction image)), the display layer for displaying the second notification display displays the first notification display. It can be configured to be positioned on the upper layer side (front side of the screen) of the display layer for doing this (see FIG. 60A).
With this configuration, the second notification display can be displayed with priority over the first notification display.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming machine including the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b notifies the player of predetermined information in accordance with a predetermined operation (for example, a volume changing operation or a brightness changing operation) performed by the player. Display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or brightness image)) on the display device 41, and operation sounds according to a predetermined operation of the player, speakers 19a, 19b. Output control means (production control device 300) for outputting from the display control means, the display control means, during the display of the notification display, a non-display period during which the display of the notification display is prohibited (for example, a stop display period of the identification information, Display period of the power failure recovery screen), the display of the notification display is stopped, and the output control means continues to output the operation sound even when the non-display period starts while the operation sound is being output. To (Fig. 56 (d) ~ (e), t105~t1 in FIG. 57
09, see t126 to t128 in FIG. 58).

That is, since the non-display period is provided in the notification display, the notification display can be preferably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is secured as much as possible. In particular,
For example, by setting the stop display period of the identification information (decorative special pattern) and the display period of the power failure recovery screen to the non-display period, the notification display will not be displayed together with the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen. The notification display can be preferably displayed without hindering the visibility of the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen.
Further, even if the display time of the notification display is shortened by the start of the non-display period, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption, so that the player can recognize that the predetermined operation is normally accepted. ..
The notification display in which the non-display period is set is not limited to the volume image G11 and the brightness image and can be changed as appropriate, and may be the error image G12 or the instruction image, for example.

《Button production》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment) uses the image displayed on the display device 41 to set the operation valid period as the button effect in which the player intervenes the operation of the effect button 25. It is possible to execute a button effect for notifying and a button effect for notifying the effective operation period by the light emission of the effect button 25.
Specifically, the effect control device 300 can execute a first type button effect, a second type button effect, and a third type button effect.

As shown in, for example, FIGS. 62A to 62B, the first type button effect, when the button effect starts, the display device 41 displays a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25 and the remaining operation valid period. The remaining length notification image G22 (here, the time bar image) for notifying the length and the operation mode instruction image G23 for instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, “press!” Or “continuous hit!”).
Character image) and an effect change image G24 (here, a meter image) that is changed by operating the effect button 25. That is, in the first type button effect,
The image displayed on the display device 41 can inform that the operation is in the valid period and the remaining length of the valid period.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (c) to (d), the second type button effect is an effect in which when the button effect is started, the effect button 25 is switched from a light-off state to a light emitting state (for example, a lighted state). .. That is, in the second type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period by the light emission of the effect button 25.
In the third type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to (f), when the button effect starts, a button image G21, a remaining length notification image G22, and the like are displayed on the display device 41, and It is an effect in which the effect button 25 is switched from the extinguished state to the light emitting state. That is, in the third type of button effect, the image displayed on the display device 41 can notify that the operation effective period is in progress and the remaining length of the operation effective period, and the effect button 25
It is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period by emitting the light.

In the case of the first type button effect, since the remaining length notification image G22 is displayed, it is possible to notify not only that the operation valid period is in progress but also the remaining length of the operation valid period. Therefore, for example, the player is allowed to select at what timing in the operation effective period the operation button 25 is operated, or the player is made to think that the operation button 25 should be operated because the operation effective period is imminent. You can
Further, in the case of the second type button effect, since the effect button 25 emits light, the player's attention to the effect button 25 can be improved. Further, since it is unknown when the light emission of the effect button 25 will be extinguished (that is, when the operation valid period ends), it is possible to make the player think of operating the effect button 25 early before the light emission is extinguished. it can.
Further, in the present embodiment, not only the first type button effect and the second type button effect but also the third type button effect in which the first type and the second type are combined can be executed, so that various buttons can be executed. The production can be executed, it is not monotonous, and interest is increased.
In the following description, when the first type button effect, the second type button effect, and the third type button effect are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as button effects.

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first type button effect.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), for example. That is, the variable display of the decorative special symbol is started on the display device 41.
When the special figure variable display game is a game that executes the first type button effect,
For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the effect control device 300 starts the first type button effect during the execution of the special figure variation display game. As a result, the button image G is displayed on the display device 41.
21, the remaining length notification image G22, the operation mode instruction image G23, and the effect change image G24 are displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, the effect control device 300 causes the value of the effect change image G24 (here, as shown in FIGS. 63 (c), (d), and (e)). Increase the meter value).
Then, when the operation valid period is up, the effect control device 300, for example, FIG.
As shown in f), the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the operation mode instruction image G2
3 and 3 are deleted and the result of the button effect is notified.

In the present embodiment, the start timing and execution time of the button effect are set such that the button effect starts after the variable display of the decorative special symbol starts and the button effect ends before the variable display of the decorative special symbol ends. Has been done. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period related to the button effect falls within the variable display period of the decorative special symbol.

The button effects of the present embodiment include a button effect with an expectation level of "low" (a button effect with a low expectation level) and a button effect with an expectation level of "medium" (a button effect with an expectation level of medium). , There is a button effect with a high expectation level (a button effect with a high expectation level).
Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure changing display game is out of alignment and the reach does not occur in the special figure changing display game, the expected button effect is executed in the special figure changing display game. If the button effect with the degree level “low” is most easily selected, the result of the special map change display game is a big hit, and if the reach of SP reach or more occurs in the special map change display game, the special effect is displayed. As the button effect to be executed in the figure variation display game, the button effect with the expectation level "high" is most easily selected, and in other cases, the button effect with the expectation level "medium" is most easily selected. There is.

Then, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64A, for example, the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 has the expectation level of “low”. Is set to "+1", the expectation level is set to "+2" when the expectation level is "medium", and "+3" is set when the expectation level is "high". Therefore, the change level of the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 can indicate the expectation level of the button effect being executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, every time the effect button 25 is operated, the effect change image G24 is produced.
Since the meter value of (meter image) is increased by "2", it is understood that the button effect with the expectation level "medium" is being executed.
The amount of change shown in FIG. 64 (a) may be the amount of change until the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Specifically, for example, in the case of a button effect with an expectation level of "high", the meter value is increased by "3" each time the effect button 25 is operated once, until the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value. (That is, it changes with the change amount shown in FIG. 64A), and after the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value, the increase amount of the meter value per operation of the effect button 25 gradually decreases, and , After the meter value reaches near the upper limit value, if the button effect is successful (for example, if the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a special result), the meter value reaches the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the button effect fails, the meter value does not reach the upper limit value (that is, the meter value does not change even if the effect button 25 is operated).
It may be configured as follows. That is, the change amount of the effect change image G24 in one button effect may be fixed, or may be changed according to the state of the effect change image G24 or the progress of the button effect.
Further, the effect change image G24 (meter image) is not limited to the one in which the meter value increases in accordance with the operation of the effect button 25. That is, the production change image G24 (meter image) is
The meter value may be decreased according to the operation of the effect button 25, and in that case, the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 is: For example, when the expectation level is "low", it is set to "-1", and the expectation level is "
In the case of "medium", it is set to "-2", and in the case of the expectation level being "high", it is set to "-3".

Here, in the volume notification, the change amount of the volume image G11 per one increasing operation is always “+1” as shown in, for example, FIGS. 64 (c) to 64 (d), and for example, FIGS. As shown in f), the change amount of the volume image G11 per one reduction operation is always "-1". The same applies to the case of brightness notification. Therefore, when adjusting the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.), the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, volume image G, brightness image) for one operation is constant. As a result, reliable adjustment can be performed.
On the other hand, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the absolute value of the change amount of the image (for example, the effect change image G24) for one operation is not constant. That is, since the absolute value of the amount of change in the image with respect to one operation is varied when participating in the effect, it is possible to execute an entertaining button effect which is not monotonous, and the effect button 25 can be executed. The function can be fully exerted.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 64B, in the second type button effect and the third type button effect, the emission color of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Therefore, the emission color of the effect button 25 can indicate the expected level of the button effect being executed.
The display color of the button image G21 may be different depending on the expectation level of the button effect. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display color of the button image G21 and the emission color of the effect button 25 in the third type button effect may or may not be the same.

Further, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is not limited to the lighted state. That is, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 may be a blinking state. Furthermore, when the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is in the blinking state, the flashing speed of the effect button 25 may be configured to be different depending on the expected level of the button effect.
It is also possible to suggest the remaining length of the effective operation period by the light emitting state of the effect button 25. Specifically, for example, the flashing speed of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually increase (or decrease), or the emission color of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually approach a predetermined color. Alternatively, it is controlled so that it lights up while the remaining length of the operation valid period is equal to or longer than the predetermined length and blinks while the remaining length of the operation valid period is less than the predetermined length. You may.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the effect change image G24 during execution of the second type button effect.
Although is not displayed, it is possible to display the effect change image G24 in the second type button effect. In the second type button effect, the expected color level can be suggested by the emission color of the effect button 25, so it is not necessary to suggest the expected level by the amount of change in the effect change image G24. That is, when the effect change image G24 is displayed in the second type button effect, the change amount of the effect change image G24 may be different according to the expected level of the button effect, or the change of the button effect. It may be constant regardless of the expectation level.
In addition, in the third type button effect in which the first type button effect and the second type button effect are overlapped and executed, the start timing of the first type button effect and the start of the second type button effect are performed. The timing may be different. Specifically, for example, the effect of fading in the button image G21 is executed by starting the first type button effect first, and the second type button effect is started at the same time when the button image G21 completely appears. Then, the effect button 25 may be switched to the light emitting state.

Further, the effect change image G24 is not limited to the meter image in which the meter value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operation means, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the effect change image G24 may be, for example, a numerical image in which the numerical value increases (or decreases) in accordance with the operation of the operation unit.
Further, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that moves according to the operation of the operation means, and in this case, the amount of movement of the character image is the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, the amount of movement of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 varies depending on the expected level of the button effect.
Further, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that is enlarged (or reduced) according to the operation of the operation means. In this case, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image is the effect. This is the amount of change in the usage change image G24. That is, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 varies depending on the expected level of the button effect.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for performing the game (decoration special figure variation display game) in which the identification information (decoration special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. An operation means that can be operated by the player (production button 25 or a cross key (not shown)),
Display control means capable of displaying a first display (for example, a volume image G11 or a luminance image) and a second display (for example, a change image for effect G24) on the display device 41 as a display that changes according to the operation of the operation means (effect control). Apparatus 300), and the first display has a constant absolute value of the change amount based on one operation, and the second display has the absolute value of the change amount based on one operation based on a predetermined condition ( For example,
It depends on the degree of expectation of the special figure variation display game being executed).

Therefore, by using the first display, in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is constant, as the adjustment image (for example, the volume image G or the brightness image) that changes according to the operation for adjusting the game environment. It becomes possible to make a reliable adjustment. Moreover, the second display in which the absolute value of the change amount based on one operation differs depending on the predetermined condition is the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, so that it is not monotonous and has a high interest. It becomes possible to execute a button effect. In other words, by operating the operating means, it is possible to make a reliable adjustment or participate in a highly entertaining button effect, so that the operating means is positively operated. Can be effectively utilized.

The first display is not limited to the adjustment image (for example, the volume image G or the brightness image) and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second display is not limited to the production change image G24 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation of changing the first display and the operation of changing the second display may be performed using the same operation means.
In addition, the predetermined condition is not limited to the expectation level (the big hit expectation level or the reach expectation level) of the special figure variation display game being executed, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be. As a result, the result of the prefetch determination can be suggested by the second display.
Further, the first display and the second display may be able to be displayed not only during the variable display of the identification information but also during the big hit (special game state) or during the display of the customer waiting screen.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first display (adjustment image (for example, volume image G or luminance image)) is hidden during the period in which the identification information (decorative special pattern) is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 56). (See (a)), the operation valid period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, the operation valid period is notified for the operation corresponding to the second display, and the identification information is changed as the operation valid period. It can be configured such that a period within the displayed period is notified (see FIG. 63).

With this configuration, when a display screen including both the first display and the second display is displayed on the display device 41, for example, an operation of changing the first display and an operation of changing the second display can be performed. It is possible to suggest which operation should be performed first. That is, the operation valid period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, while the operation valid period is notified for the operation corresponding to the second display, thereby preferentially performing the operation for changing the second display. Can suggest what to do. Therefore, for example, by setting the second display as the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, the player cannot participate in the button effect because the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.) was adjusted. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience and prevent the interest from being lowered.

In addition, during the non-display period during which the first display is hidden, the operation of changing the first display is enabled and the first display is internally changed (that is, the gaming environment such as volume and brightness is adjusted). )
You may do it.
Further, during the period when the second display is not displayed, the operation of changing the second display may be enabled or disabled.
The temporary stop of the identification information (decorative special pattern) is not included in the stop display of the identification information, but the identification information is included in the variable display. Therefore, even if the stop display period of the identification information is the non-display period in which the display of the first display (adjustment image (for example, the volume image G or the brightness image)) is prohibited, the first display is displayed during the temporary stop of the identification information. It can be displayed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. An operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by a person, and an informing means (effect control device 300) for informing the operation effective period of the operation means are provided. The first notification mode (see FIG. 62 (b)) capable of recognizing that there is an operation valid period and the remaining time of the operation valid period, and recognizing that the operation valid period is in progress, and the operation valid period A second notification mode (see FIG. 62 (d)) in which it is impossible to recognize the remaining time of
Therefore, the first notification mode and the second notification mode can be used alone or in combination with each other (see FIG. 62).

That is, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation effective period is notified only in the first notification mode, and an effect in which the operation effective period is notified only in the second notification mode, It is possible to execute an effect in which the operation valid period is notified in both the first notification mode and the second notification mode. Therefore, since various effects can be executed as effects in which the operation of the player is intervened, it is not monotonous and the interest of the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 62B) uses an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color (in the case of the present embodiment, the backlight of the display device 41). The second notification mode (see FIG. 62D) is a mode for notifying the operation valid period, and the second notification mode (see FIG. 62D) is an assembly of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors (in the case of the present embodiment, a light emitting element group built in the effect button 25). Can be used to notify the operation valid period.
With such a configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation effective period is informed only by a set of monochromatic light sources of the same color, and a set of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors It is possible to execute the effect in which the operation effective period is notified only by the body and the effect in which the operation effective period is informed by both the aggregate of the monochromatic light sources of the same color and the aggregate of the monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors. .. Therefore, various effects can be executed as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is not monotonous, and the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be enhanced.

The aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color is not limited to the backlight of the display device 41 and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be provided with an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color that emit light during the operation effective period (monochromatic lamp or the like).
Further, the group of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors is not limited to the light emitting element group built in the effect button 25, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 may be provided with an assembly (multicolor lamp or the like) of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors that emit light during the effective operation period.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 62 (b)) is based on the image displayed on the display device 41 (for example, the button image G21 or the remaining length notification image G22), the operation valid period. The second notification mode (see FIG. 62D) can be configured to notify the effective operation period by causing the operation means (effect button 25) to emit light.
With such a configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an operation in which the operation effective period is informed only by the image displayed on the display device 41, and operation is performed only by the light emission of the operation means. It is possible to execute the effect in which the effective period is informed and the effect in which the operation effective period is informed by both the image displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the operating means. Therefore, various effects can be executed as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is not monotonous, and the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be enhanced.

<Direction of payout number notification>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment), as a payout notification effect for notifying the total payout amount, the total payout from the start of the special gaming state to the present time during the special gaming state. A first payout number notification effect for notifying the number, and a second payout number notification effect for notifying the total payout amount from the start of the special game state to the present time during the special game state (first hit) and the time saving state thereafter. Is feasible.
In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts is the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38). The total number of payouts is not limited to the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the sum of the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to 35.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the first payout amount notification effect.
The first payout amount notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that does not cause a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that does not cause a time saving state, the effect control device 300 When the special game state based on the special result is started, the first payout amount notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the accumulated total number image G31 for notifying the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (b) to (d), for example, “+14” is added to the total payout amount each time a game ball wins the special winning opening.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), when the special game state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the first payout amount notification effect and deletes the accumulated total number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (f) to (j), the upper plate 21 is in the middle of the special game state.
When an overflow error indicating that the lower plate 23 is filled with game balls and cannot be paid out occurs, an error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. This error image G1
For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (j), 2 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved even if the special game state ends in the middle.
65 (f) to (j) exemplify a case where an overflow error occurs during the special game state, but the same applies when another error occurs during the special game state. The image G12 is displayed at the time when the error is detected, and even if the special game state ends midway, the image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 66 shows an example of the second payout amount notification effect.
The second payout amount notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that causes a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that causes a time saving state, the effect control device 3
00 starts the second payout amount notification effect when the special game state based on the special result is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the accumulated total number image G31 for notifying the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, each time a game ball wins the big winning opening, for example, "+14" is added to the total payout amount.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (b) to 66 (d), in the second payout amount notification effect, the display of the accumulated cumulative amount image G31 is displayed even after the special game state (first hit) is finished and the time saving state is started. Will continue.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), when the time saving state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the second payout amount notification effect and deletes the accumulated cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (f) to (j), it is shown that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out in the middle of the time saving state (including the first hit). When an overflow error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. This error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved, even if the time saving state ends midway, as shown in FIG. 66 (j), for example.
66 (f) to 66 (j) exemplify a case where an overflow error occurs during the time saving state, but similarly when the other error occurs during the time saving state, the error image G12 is also generated. Is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the time saving state ends midway, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 67 (a) shows an example of the display / non-display timing of the accumulated total number image G31 and the error image G12.
For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), when a special game state based on a special result that does not cause a time saving state is started, the first payout amount notification effect is started and the accumulated total number image G31 is displayed on the display device 4.
1 is displayed (t151).
Next, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t15).
2).

Next, when the special game state ends, the first payout amount notification effect ends and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted (t153).
Next, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t154).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the special game state based on the special result that causes the time saving state is started, the second payout amount notification effect is started, and the accumulated total number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. It is displayed (t155).
Next, when the special game state ends, the time saving state starts (t156).

The result of the special figure variation display game is special before the time saving state ends (that is, before the number of executions of the special figure variation display game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) after the last special game state ends). As a result, if the special result is a special result that does not cause a time saving condition,
When the special figure variation display game ends, the time saving state ends. Therefore, in that case, when the special figure variation display game ends, the second payout notification effect ends and the first payout notification effect starts.
On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game result is a special result before the time saving state ends, and the special result is a special result that causes the time saving state, the time saving state is extended. Therefore,
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the second payout amount notification effect continues even after the special figure variation display game ends.

Next, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t15).
9).
Next, when the time saving state ends, the second payout amount notification effect ends, and the accumulated total number image G3
1 is erased (t160).
Next, when the error is eliminated, the error image G12 is deleted (t161).

In this way, in the first payout amount notification effect, when the special game state starts, the accumulated cumulative number image G3
When 1 is displayed and the special game state ends, the accumulated total number image G31 is deleted. on the other hand,
In the second payout amount notification production, the accumulated total number image G31 is displayed when the special game state (first hit) starts, and the accumulated total number image G31 is deleted when the time saving state ends. That is, the first
The display period of the accumulated cumulative number image G31 is different between the payout amount notification effect and the second payout amount notification effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 56 (a), the error image G is also displayed during the special game state occurrence period.
It is a displayable period during which 12 or the instruction image can be displayed.

On the gaming machine 10, the player can display the total number of prize balls paid out in one special game state and the total number of prize balls paid out in the special game state and the time saving state thereafter. The number of game balls that have been acquired can be grasped to enhance the interest of the game. However, trouble is likely to occur in a state where prize balls are continuously paid out, such as a special game state or a time saving state. Examples of such a trouble include, for example, a ball clogging in front of the inlet to the lower plate 23, the lower plate 23 cannot be released from the full state even if the ball is removed, or a problem occurs in the payout unit. There are problems such as being unable to pay. When such a trouble occurs, the payout of the game balls is stopped, and an error image G12 is displayed to notify the occurrence of an error (an overflow error, a payout abnormality error, etc.) that stops the payout of the game balls. .

In order to enhance the interest of the game, an image (for example, the accumulated total number image G31) that allows the player to grasp the number of game balls acquired is displayed rather than an error image G12 that notifies the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls. The display may be prioritized, but in this case, the error may not be noticed, and the game may be stopped before all the prize balls are paid out, which may disadvantage the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls, the display of the error image G12 is given priority over the display of the accumulated total number image G31. . Here, "prioritize" is to display on the near side.

That is, the effect control device 300, in the effect display editing process, draws the accumulated total number image G31 on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), and acquires the accumulated total number image G31.
The error image G12 is drawn in the display layer on the screen front side of the display layer in which is drawn.
Specifically, for example, when the accumulated total number image G31 is the “notice D layer”, the error image G12 is drawn on the “notice E layer” or the “notice F layer”.
Therefore, when a display screen including both the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, as shown in, for example, FIG. 65 (h), (i) or FIG. 66 (i), The error image G12 is displayed on the near side of the accumulated total number image G31. Therefore, when the display area of the accumulated total number image G31 and the display area of the error image G12 overlap, the portion of the accumulated total number image G31 that overlaps the error image G12 is hidden by the error image G12 and is not visible. Becomes

By the way, the effect control device 300 can store the number of winnings to the special winning opening in the RAM 322, and the total payout amount based on the number of winnings to the special winning opening from the start of the special game state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time. The number is calculated, and the calculated total payout amount is notified by the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect. Alternatively, the RAM 322 can store the number of payout game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the special winning opening, and the number of payout game balls from the start of the special game state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time is the first total payout number. Payout number notification production and second
The number of payouts is notified by a presentation effect.
When a power failure occurs during execution of the first payout amount notification effect and the second payout amount notification effect, the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect are restarted when the power failure is restored. However, since the RAM 322 is a storage unit that cannot store and retain the stored information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped, the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect restarted after the power failure is restored. In that case, it is impossible to inform the accurate total amount of payout.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68A to 68C, when a power outage occurs during execution of the first payout amount notification effect, the first payout amount notification effect is restored after the power outage is restored. Is resumed. However, since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total payout amount notified by the cumulative total number image G31 is cleared to zero.
The same applies to the case of the second payout number notification effect. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (d) to (f), when a power failure occurs during execution of the second payout amount notification effect, the second payout number notification effect is restarted after the power failure is restored. It However, since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total payout amount notified by the cumulative total number image G31 is cleared to zero.

In addition, when the power is restored, a process for checking whether an error has occurred is performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68, for example, when the error that has occurred before the power outage has not been resolved after the power outage is restored, the error image G12 that was displayed before the power outage is displayed even after the power outage is restored. . That is, when the power failure is restored, the acquired cumulative number image G31 cannot be displayed as if it was continuously displayed, but the error image G12 can be displayed as if it was continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in interest, etc., when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped, the storage means (RAM 322) that cannot store and store the stored information is awarded to the special winning opening. The number and the number of payout game balls are stored. Specifically, for example, at the moment of power outage,
If there is still a rolling game ball in the game area 32 (a game ball before entering the winning opening or the out opening), even if the gaming ball wins the winning opening, there is a power outage. The prize will be invalid (cannot be counted accurately). Therefore, if you keep the number of prizes and the number of payout game balls to the big prize hole before the power failure after the power failure is restored, the total number of payouts that do not reflect the prizes of the game balls that were still rolling at the moment of the power failure is reported. It will be done and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the number of winnings to the special winning opening and the number of payout game balls are stored in a storage means that cannot be stored.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 44a movably provided in front of the display device 41, and the display device 4 is provided in the moving range of the movable accessory 44a.
When a position overlapping at least part of the error image G12 displayed in 1 is included in the error image G12, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, and the occurrence of the error is notified not only in the mode. It is preferable.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the movable accessory 44a is located at the first position (the position shown in FIG. 69A) retracted from the front of the display device 41 and at the front of the display device 41. It is assumed that it is possible to move between at least a part of the error image G12 and the second position (the position shown in FIG. 69 (b)) that overlaps the front and rear. In this case, the error image G12 is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and is difficult to visually recognize during a part of the period during which the movable accessory 44a is moving or during a period in which the movable accessory 44a is in the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the player will not be aware of the error and will stop the game before all the prize balls are paid out, and the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the first mode in which the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the speakers 19a and 19a are provided.
Even in the second mode in which an error sound (for example, a voice "please pull out the ball") is output from b, the occurrence of the error is notified. The error notification of the second aspect may be performed only when the effect using the movable accessory 44a is being executed, or may be performed regardless of whether the effect by the movable accessory 44a is being executed. ..
It is also possible to further dispose a light guide plate (another character) or the like in front of the movable accessory 44a (on the side of the player), and in that case, an effect by the light guide plate (an effect such as a character appearing) is displayed. Is likely to overlap the error image G12, the effect by the light guide plate (another accessory) may be stopped or interrupted while the error image G12 is displayed (that is, an error is occurring).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (special variation winning device). In the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which 38) is converted into a state in which the gaming balls are easy to win, the number-of-balls notification display for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the variable winning device (acquired cumulative number image G31) is displayed on the display device 41 as a first display control means (production control device 3).
00) and an error display that notifies that an error has occurred to stop the payout of gaming balls (
Second display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the error image G12) on the display device 41.
And the sphere number notification display and the error display can be displayed simultaneously, and the error display has a higher display priority than the sphere number notification display (see FIG. 67 (b)). It is displayed during the special game state, and is hidden when the special game state ends, and the error display can be displayed during the special game state and can be displayed even after the end of the special game state (FIG. 65 and FIG. 67 (
See a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the number-of-balls notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the number-of-balls notification display is hidden when the special gaming state ends, but is displayed as an error. Can be displayed even after the end of the special game state, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (based on the establishment of a predetermined condition) (
When the result of the special figure variation display game) is a special result, the variation in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which the variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) is converted into a state in which the game balls are easy to win the prize. First display control means (production control device 300) for displaying on the display device 41 a ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31) for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the winning device.
), And second display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying an error display (error image G12) on the display device 41 informing that an error has occurred for stopping the payout of gaming balls.
After the special game state is over, a specific game state (time saving state) different from the special game state can be generated, and the ball count notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time. 67 has a higher display priority (see FIG. 67 (b)), the sphere number notification display is displayed during the specific game state, is hidden when the specific game state ends, and the error display is during the specific game state. Can be displayed in, and can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state (FIG. 66 or FIG. 67).
(See (a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the number-of-balls notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the number-of-balls notification display is hidden when the specific game state ends, but is displayed as an error. Can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state, so it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls.

The variable winning device is not limited to the special winning port (special variable winning device 38) and may be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the large winning port having a V switch.
Further, in the present embodiment, an image having a higher display priority is displayed closer to the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that an image with a higher display priority has higher visibility. For example, an image with a higher display priority may be displayed closer to the center of the screen, or may be displayed in a larger size. The display color may be higher, the display color may be higher, or the display may be lower in transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority may have a higher transparency). When the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed while the second image is being displayed. Good as a display.
Further, in the present embodiment, an image with a higher priority is drawn in a display layer closer to the screen, so that an image with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the front.
It is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to draw on the same display layer regardless of the display priority. In that case, an image with a higher display priority is displayed in a higher priority order so that an image with a higher display priority is displayed. , Draw on the same display layer while arranging it on the front side.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory 44a movably provided in front of the display device 41 and an aspect in which an error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 are different. , Notification means (speakers 19a, 19b and effect control device 300) for notifying the occurrence of an error, and in the moving range of the movable accessory 44a, at least a part of the error display displayed on the display device 41 and before and after. Can be configured to include positions that overlap.
See FIG. 69).
That is, the error notification can be performed not only in the first mode in which the error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 but also in the second mode different from the first mode.

With this configuration, the error display (error image G12) is displayed on the movable accessory 44a.
Even if it is difficult to see because it is hidden by, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the error by the error notification of the second aspect, so avoiding the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of the error that stops the payout of the game balls. be able to.
The error notification of the second mode is not limited to the mode of outputting an error sound. Specifically, the error notification of the second mode includes the display of the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. At least one of them may be used to notify the occurrence of an error. Also, the game machine 10
However, when the vibrating device or the air blowing device is provided as the production device, it is possible to execute the error notification of the second aspect by using the vibrating device or the air blowing device. Further, when the gaming machine 10 includes a liquid crystal display device other than the display device 41, it is possible to execute the error notification of the second mode using the liquid crystal display device.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling a payout mechanism (payout unit) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball, and an error for stopping the payout of the game ball is generated. , A storage tray capable of storing the game balls paid out from the payout mechanism (upper plate 21
And at least one of an error indicating that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23) (overflow error) and an error indicating that the payout control means is abnormal (payout error). be able to.
With this configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls.

<< Production sound and error sound >>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment) includes speakers 19a and 1a.
From 9b, it is possible to output an effect sound that produces a game and an error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error.
In the conventional gaming machine, it is customary that the error sound is output with priority over the effect sound, that is, the error sound is output in a state where the volume of the effect sound is lowered (including the mute state).
For example, for the effect sound output during the special game state, for example, round B that is always output
There are GM and sounds output during a specific period (hereinafter referred to as "limited-time sounds"). The limited time sound is, for example, a probable variation promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a production sound that has a higher interest to the player than the round BGM. Therefore, if the error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, if the limited time sound is output with priority over the error sound, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.
However, there are multiple types of errors, and depending on the type of error, inconvenience may occur by giving priority to outputting the limited-time sound over the error sound. Specifically, for example, errors related to fraudulent activities (front frame opening error, gaming machine frame opening error, frame radio error, board radio error, magnetic error, special winning opening fraud error, universal denial error, vibration error, etc. When the limited time sound is output with priority over the error sound for notifying), it becomes late for the clerk of the game shop to notice the occurrence of the error, and the game machine is apt to be fraudulent.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the predetermined effect sound is classified into the first effect sound and the second effect sound, and the predetermined error sound is classified into the first error sound and the second error sound. The output control is performed so that the priority order becomes higher in the order of effect sound <first error sound <second effect sound <second error sound.
Specifically, for example, among the effect sounds output during the special game state, the round BGM is the first effect sound, and the limited time limited sound such as the probability variation promotion sound is the second effect sound. Further, among the error sounds that may be output during the special game state, an unrelated fraudulent error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error not related to a fraudulent activity such as an overflow error is set as the first error sound, and the frame opening error ( A fraud-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error related to a fraudulent activity such as a front frame opening error or a gaming machine frame opening error) is referred to as a second error sound. That is, in the sounds output during the special game state, the priority of output is high in the order of round BGM <incorrect non-related error sound <period limited sound <incorrect related error sound.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the output / non-output timing of the effect sound and the error sound.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the special game state is started, the output of the round BGM is started (t181).
Next, at the timing of outputting the probability variation promotion sound, the round BGM is in the non-output state (t182).

Since the probability variation promotion sound has a lower priority than the frame opening error sound (error sound that notifies the occurrence of the frame opening error), the probability variation promotion sound is output during the period when the probability variation promotion sound output and the frame opening error sound output overlap. Is in a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period in which the output of the probability variation promotion sound and the output of the frame opening error sound overlap is t182 to t183.
In addition, since the probability variation promotion sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound (the error sound that notifies the occurrence of the overflow error), the overflow error sound is generated during the period when the probability variation promotion sound output and the overflow error sound output overlap. It is in a non-output state. For example, FIG.
In the example shown in (1), the period in which the output of the probable variation promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t184.
Further, since the frame opening error sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound, the overflow error sound is in a non-output state during the period when the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period in which the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t183.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the timing of outputting the probable variation promotion sound, the timing of outputting the frame opening error sound, and the timing of outputting the overflow error sound arrive at the same time, the probability variation promotion sound and the overflow sound are generated. The error sound is not output and the frame opening error sound is output (t182). Then, when the output of the frame opening error sound ends, the probability variation promotion sound is output from the middle (t183), and when the output of the probability variation promotion sound ends, the overflow error sound is output from the middle (t184), and the overflow error sound output. When is finished, the output of the round BGM is restarted (t185).

Here, the non-output state is a state in which the reproduction is performed but the outputs from the speakers 19a and 19b are not performed. Note that the non-output state may be a state in which neither reproduction nor output from the speakers 19a and 19b is performed.
Further, in FIG. 70, the overflow error sound is illustrated as the first error sound, but the first error sound may be an unauthorized non-related error sound other than the overflow error sound.
Further, in FIG. 70, a frame opening error sound is illustrated as the second error sound, but the second error sound may be an unauthorized related error sound other than the frame opening error sound.
In addition, in FIG. 70, the probabilistic change promotion sound is illustrated as the second effect sound, but the second effect sound is a period limited sound (round promotion sound, V switch passing effect sound, etc.) other than the probabilistic change promotion sound. Is also good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority order of the unauthorized non-related error sound is set lower than the priority order of the period limited sound from the viewpoint of securing the output opportunity of the period limited sound as much as possible. Specifically, the fraud-related error sound is prioritized over the time limited sound, while the fraud non-related error sound is not prioritized over the time limited sound. That is, by adding the priority to be output to the error sound, an error sound that should be output until the output of the limited time sound is blocked, and an error sound that should not be output until the output of the limited time sound is blocked. Can be distinguished. Therefore, since the opportunity for outputting the limited-time sound is secured as much as possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment of the game, and since the fraud-related error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, fraud is less likely to occur. Even if it occurs, it can be dealt with immediately.

It should be noted that when the fraud-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of the error related to the fraudulent activity is output, the fraud-related error image that notifies the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Also, at the time of outputting an unrelated fraudulent error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error that is not related to cheating,
An unauthorized non-related error image notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Also, at the time of outputting a limited-time sound (such as a probable variation promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high-probability state after the special game state ends), a limited-time image (after the special game state ends Fig. Probability change promotion image that notifies that the probability state of the variable display game becomes a high probability state)
May be displayed on the display device 41.

Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-unrelated error image, and the limited-time image may or may not be the same as that of the sound. That is, the display control may be performed such that the priority order becomes higher in the order of the unauthorized non-related error image <the limited time image <the unauthorized related error image (the same order as the sound), for example, the limited time image <the unauthorized non-related The display control may be performed such that the priority order becomes higher in the order of the error image <the error-related error image (the order different from the sound).
In the present embodiment, an image having a higher display priority is displayed closer to the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that an image with a higher display priority has higher visibility. For example, an image with a higher display priority may be displayed closer to the center of the screen, or may be displayed in a larger size. The display color may be higher, the display color may be higher, or the display may be lower in transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority may have a higher transparency). When the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed while the second image is being displayed. Good as a display.
Further, the method of displaying the image with the higher display priority on the front side may be the method of drawing the image with the higher priority on the display layer on the front side of the screen. It is also possible to draw an image having a high pixel ratio on the same display layer in a state of being arranged on the nearer side.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the output control means (production control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the predetermined. Special game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the satisfaction of the condition is a special result, and outputs The control means, during the occurrence of the special game state, as the effect sound for effecting the game, the first effect sound (for example, round BGM) and the second effect sound having a higher output priority than the first effect sound (for example, the effect sound). A limited time sound) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and a first error sound (for example, an unauthorized non-related error sound) is output as an error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error during the occurrence of the special game state. If the priority of the output than the first error sound is higher second
An error sound (for example, a fraudulent error sound) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b,
When an error occurs that outputs the second error sound when the first effect sound is output or when the second effect sound is output, the second error sound is preferentially output and the first effect sound is output first. When an error that outputs an error sound occurs, the first error sound is preferentially output, and when an error that outputs the first error sound occurs when the second effect sound is output, the second effect sound is output. Is output with priority (Fig. 7
0).

Therefore, since the second effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, it is possible to preferably output the error sound so that the output opportunity of the second effect sound is secured as much as possible.
In addition, since the second error sound is output with priority over the first effect sound, the second effect sound, and the first error sound, for example, by setting the second error sound as a fraud related error sound, fraud occurs. Hard to do,
Even if it occurs, it is possible to take immediate action.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (speaker 1 that can output a predetermined sound).
9a, 19b), output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means, display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and control of the display means. In the gaming machine provided with the display control means (effect control device 300) to perform, the output control means can change the volume of the sound output means according to a predetermined operation, and an effect sound (for example, a limited-time sound), A first error sound (for example, a false non-related error sound) notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error;
It is possible to output a second error sound having a higher priority of output than the error sound (for example, a fraudulent-related error sound), and when an error occurs that outputs the second error sound when the effect sound is output, 2 error sound is preferentially output, and when an error occurs in which the first error sound is output when the effect sound is output, the effect sound is prioritized and output, and the display control means (effect control device 300) It is possible to display the volume information (volume image G11) that can be changed according to the change of the volume of the sound output means, and when an error of outputting the second error sound occurs at the time of outputting the effect sound, the effect is generated. The second error notification image (eg, fraud related error image) corresponding to the second error sound can be displayed with priority over the effect image (eg, limited-time image) corresponding to the sound, and the first error is output when the effect sound is output. An error occurs that outputs a sound When it can be preferentially displayed first error notification image corresponding to the first error sound than effect image corresponding to the effect sound (e.g. invalid related non-error image).

Therefore, since the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, it is possible to preferably output the error sound so that the opportunity for outputting the effect sound is secured as much as possible.
Further, since the second error sound is output with priority over the effect sound and the first error sound, for example,
By using the second error sound as the fraud-related error sound, fraud is unlikely to occur, and even if it occurs, it is possible to immediately deal with it.
Further, the priority order of sounds is first error sound <effect sound <second error sound, whereas the priority order of images is effect image <first error notification image <second error notification image. That is, the priority of sound and the priority of images are different. Therefore, since the effect sound can be output with priority over the first error sound, and the first error notification image can be displayed with priority over the effect image, the sound priority and the image priority are the same. In comparison with the case (that is, when the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound and the effect image is displayed with priority over the first error notification image), when the first error occurs It is possible to take immediate action.
In the present embodiment, when the timing of outputting the first sound and the timing of outputting the second sound having a higher priority than the first sound overlap, when the second sound is being output. Although the first sound is in the non-output state, that is, the mute state, the first sound is not limited to this. That is, while the second sound is being output, the first sound is in a state in which the volume is lower than the original volume (volume when the output timing does not overlap with the second sound) (including the mute state). good.

<Operation sound and error sound>
As described above, when the player performs a change operation (volume change operation or brightness change operation) for adjusting the game environment, operation sounds corresponding to the change operation are output from the speakers 19a and 19b (FIG. 56). reference). In the present embodiment, the operation sound corresponding to the changing operation is set to have a lower priority than the fraud-related error sound and a higher priority than the fraud-unrelated error sound.
FIG. 71 shows an example of volume notification during error notification. Since the same processing as that of the volume notification is performed in the brightness notification, description of the brightness notification will be omitted using the drawings.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when an unauthorized-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t198, t198,
(t201, t204), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. On the other hand, when an unauthorized-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t191, t194) and displays or operates the volume image G11. It is configured not to output the sound or adjust the volume.

72 and 73 show another example of volume notification during error notification.
The example shown in FIG. 72 is different from the example shown in FIG. 71 in that the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted during the output of the fraud-related error sound.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the fraudulent-related error sound such as the frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume changing operation (t198,
(t201, t204), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. In addition, when an unauthorized-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300
When the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194), the display of the volume image G11 and the adjustment of the volume are performed, but the operation sound may not be output.

The example shown in FIG. 73 differs from the example shown in FIG. 72 in that the operation sound is output from the middle when the output of the fraud-related error sound is completed.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the fraudulent-related error sound such as the frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume changing operation (t198,
(t201, t204), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. In addition, when an unauthorized-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300
Detects the volume change operation (t191, t194), displays the volume image G11 and adjusts the volume. After that, when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends (t195), the output of the fraud-related error sound ends. When the original output period of the operation sound (t194 to t196) has not ended at the time point, the operation sound may be output from the middle.

It should be noted that a fraud-related error image notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41 at the time of outputting the fraud-related error sound notifying the occurrence of the error related to the fraudulent activity, or an error not related to the fraudulent activity. When an unauthorized non-related error sound for reporting the occurrence of is output, an unauthorized non-related error image for reporting the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-unrelated error image, and the volume image G11 may or may not be the same as that of sound. That is, the display priority of the fraudulently related error image, the fraudulently unrelated error image, and the volume image G11 (including images such as the cross key) may or may not be the same as the sound. .. That is, the display control may be performed so that the priority order becomes higher in the order of the fraudulent non-related error image <volume image G11 <the fraudulent related error image (the same order as the sound), or the volume image G11 <the fraudulent non-related error image. <Display control may be performed so that the priority order becomes higher in the order of the fraud-related error images (the order different from the sound).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, volume setting means for changing the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b in accordance with a predetermined operation (volume changing operation) by the player. (Production control device 300), and speakers 19a, 1 according to a predetermined operation.
A display control unit (production control device 300) that displays volume information (volume image G11) on the volume of 9b on the display device 41, and an output control unit (production control device 300) that controls the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b. ), And an error sound ()
For example, when a predetermined operation is performed while the fraud-related error sound is being output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the display control unit displays the volume information, and the output control unit operates according to the volume information. No sound is output (see FIG. 72).

Therefore, the error sound is output with priority over the operation sound, so that the error sound can be preferably output.
While the error sound is being output, the operation sound corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is not output, but since the volume information corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is displayed, the player performs the predetermined operation. Can be recognized as being accepted normally.
The error sound that is output with priority over the operation sound is not limited to the fraud related error sound,
The sound can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, an unauthorized non-related error sound.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

For example, it is possible to output a predetermined sound at a volume different from the volume set by the player (or the hall). The same applies to the case of brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "4", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "4",
The volume of the limited time sound is "3", the volume of the unauthorized non-related error sound is "2", and the volume of the BGM is "1".
Also good. That is, the fraud-related error sound may be output at a volume set by the player, and the other sounds may be output at a volume below the volume set by the player.
Further, for example, when the player setting is "5", the volume of the fraudulent-related error sound is "7", the volume of the limited-time sound is "6", the volume of the fraudulent-unrelated error sound is "5", and the BGM volume. May be "4". That is, an unauthorized non-related error sound (or may be a limited time sound) is output at a volume set by the player, and a sound having a higher priority than the unauthorized non-related error sound (or limited time sound) is output to the player. May be output at a volume higher than the volume set by, and a sound having a lower priority than the unauthorized non-related error sound (or limited-time sound) may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Further, in the above embodiment, the volume can be adjusted within the range of 1 to 5, but it may be adjusted to "0 (silence)". When the player setting is “0 (silence)”, the volume of the fraudulent-related error sound may be “1” and the volume of other sounds may be “0”. That is, the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be muted. Of course, it is also possible to mute all sounds including the fraudulent-related error sounds.

Further, regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall), the ratio of the volume output within a predetermined range may be determined. That is, for example, the sound may be output according to the output sound volume value = m (player setting value) × a (magnification <coefficient> corresponding to each sound). However, when the volume set by the player (or the hall) is “0 (silence)”, the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be silenced as described above. The same applies to the case of brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "3", the volume of the fraud related error sound is set to "3.3".
(Magnification 1.1 times), volume of limited time sound is "3 (magnification 1 time)", volume of unrelated error sound is "2.4 (magnification 0.8 times)", volume of BGM is ". 2.1 (magnification 0.7 times) "and the player setting is" 4 ", the volume of the fraud related error sound is" 4.4 (magnification 1.1 times) "and the volume of the limited time sound is" 4. " 4 (magnification 1 time) ”, and the volume of the false unrelated error sound is set to“ 3.2 (magnification 0.8.
), And the BGM volume may be set to "2.8 (magnification 0.7 times)".
Further, in the case where the volume value is changed from the player set value to the hall set value in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = m (player set value) × a (each The sound is output according to the output volume value calculated by the scaling factor corresponding to the sound, and in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = M (hall setting value) × a (the scaling factor corresponding to each sound <coefficient) A sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated in>).

The error sound and the limited time sound can be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall setting), but the player (or the hall) Since it is configured to output various sounds depending on the set volume, even if an error sound or a limited time sound is output during inspection, it is not noisy, so it is possible to perform inspection work comfortably. It will be possible.
Further, when the various sounds are configured to be output depending on the volume set by the player (or the hall), the magnification and the output mode of the various sounds are predetermined, so that the control is easy and
Even if all sounds are duplicated, it is clear which one has priority, which makes it easier to understand the importance.

When using the cross keys for volume change operation and brightness change operation, use the up and down keys of the cross key for either volume change operation or brightness change operation, and use the left and right keys of the cross key for volume When used with either the change operation or the brightness change operation, when one of the up / down keys and the left / right key is operated at the same time, that is, the volume change operation and the brightness change operation are performed at the same time. In this case, (1) only change the volume or brightness.
Either (2) neither the volume change nor the brightness change is performed, or (3) both the volume change and the brightness change are performed.
Further, when the player performs a long press operation as a brightness change operation while performing a long press operation as a volume change operation to adjust the volume, (1) the volume is also changed during the brightness change operation. Continuously (does not change the brightness), (2) decreases the speed of the volume change during the brightness change operation (may be a finely adjustable function), and (3) changes the volume during the brightness change operation. Either the brightness is not changed or (4) the brightness is changed during the brightness changing operation (the volume is not changed).

10 Gaming machines 19a, 19b Speakers (informing means, sound output means)
21 Upper plate (reservoir plate)
23 Lower plate (reservoir plate)
25 Production button (operation means)
38 Special variable winning device (Variable winning device)
41 display device (display means)
44a Movable accessory 61 Magnetic sensor 62 Board radio sensor (radio sensor)
100 game control device (setting means, special game state control means)
200 Dispensing control device (dispensing control means)
300 Effect control device (informing means, display control means, output control means, first display control means, second display control means, volume setting means)
G11 Volume image (first notification display, notification display, first display, volume information)
G12 error image (second notification display, error display)
G24 production change image (second display)
G31 Cumulative total number image (ball number notification display)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a variable winning device is converted into a state in which a game ball is easy to win when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result,
First display control means for displaying on the display device a ball number notification display for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the variable winning device.
A second display control means for displaying an error display on the display device for notifying that an error has occurred for stopping the payout of gaming balls,
The display priority of the error display is higher than that of the ball number notification display,
The above-mentioned error display can be displayed during the special game state, and can be displayed even after the end of the special game state. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a variable winning device is converted into a state in which a game ball is easy to win when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result,
First display control means for displaying on the display device a ball number notification display for notifying the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the variable winning device.
A second display control means for displaying an error display on the display device for notifying that an error has occurred for stopping the payout of gaming balls,
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state different from the special game state,
The display priority of the error display is higher than that of the ball number notification display,
The above-mentioned error display can be displayed during the specific game state, and can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state.

Images